JP7662366B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, that can be controlled to create advantageous conditions for players.

There are gaming machines in which a launcher launches a gaming ball, which is a gaming medium, into a gaming area, and when the gaming ball enters a winning area such as a winning hole provided in the gaming area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There are also gaming machines (so-called pachinko machines) that are provided with a variable display device that can variably display (also called "variable") identification information, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device becomes a specific display result, the gaming state (the state of the gaming machine; therefore, specifically, the state in which the gaming machine is controlled) is changed to give a predetermined gaming value to the player. As shown in Patent Document 3, there are also gaming machines in which an image display device displays a meter whose display state can be changed from level 1 to bell 4, and one of a plurality of reach effects of super reaches is executed based on the display state of the meter becoming level 4.

The gaming value refers to the state of the variable winning ball device installed in the gaming area of the gaming machine becoming advantageous to the player in terms of making it easier for the ball to win, generating rights that lead to advantageous conditions for the player, or becoming more likely to meet the conditions for the payout of winning balls.

In a pachinko game machine, a "jackpot" occurs when a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of a special pattern (identification information) that is started on the variable display device based on the entry of a game ball into the start winning hole. The derived display means that a pattern (final stop pattern) is finally stopped and displayed. When a jackpot occurs, for example, the big prize winning hole opens a predetermined number of times, and the machine transitions to a big prize game state in which the ball is more likely to win. Then, during each opening period, if a predetermined number (e.g., 10) of big prize winning holes are won, the big prize winning hole closes. The number of times the big prize winning hole opens is fixed to a predetermined number (e.g., 15 rounds). An opening time (e.g., 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and the big prize winning hole closes when the opening time has elapsed even if the number of winning holes does not reach the predetermined number. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big prize winning hole may be called a round. Also, the game during a round may be called a round game.

In addition, in a state where a pattern other than the pattern that will be the final stop pattern (for example, the center pattern among the left, middle, and right patterns) on a variable display device continues for a predetermined time and stops, oscillates, expands and contracts, or changes shape while matching a specific display result, or where multiple patterns fluctuate synchronously with the same pattern, or the positions of the displayed patterns are swapped, and the possibility of a jackpot occurring continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states), a reach effect is called a reach effect. Also, a reach state and its appearance are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, a variable display that includes a reach effect is referred to as a reach variable display. If the display result of the pattern variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it is a "miss" and the variable display state ends. The player plays while enjoying how to generate a jackpot.

Some of these gaming machines suggest that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state and can execute multiple types of suggestive effects with different degrees of expectation depending on the presentation mode, and use a displayed special image to change the suggestive effect to a presentation mode with a higher expectation. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that a pseudo consecutive prediction effect, a development prediction effect, or an active hold prediction effect is executed by a gift image displayed when the same type of gift box is opened. Also, for example, Patent Document 2 describes that information about a role stock is displayed on the screen, which communicates to the player that a strong prediction effect in which a moving object falls will be executed later.

JP 2015-134097 A JP 2018-50980 A JP 2015-221121 A

However, there was room to improve the marketability of gaming machines having the functions and configurations described in Patent Documents 1 to 3.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances including a first suggestion performance, a second suggestion performance, a third suggestion performance, and a fourth suggestion performance as suggestion performances that suggest control to the advantageous state;
a development performance execution means capable of executing a first development performance before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is notified, and capable of executing a second development performance different from the first development performance after it is notified that the advantageous state will not be controlled as a performance result of the second suggestion performance;
A chance-up effect execution means for executing a chance-up effect in which the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state varies depending on the number of times the effect is executed during the execution of the suggestion effect;
A notice performance execution means capable of executing notice performances with different expectations depending on the performance mode;
A special image display effect execution means capable of displaying a special image;
and a special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance that changes the preview performance executed in one performance mode to a performance mode with a higher expectation than the one performance mode by using the displayed special image,
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
The third suggestion performance can be executed after the first development performance is executed,
The fourth suggestion performance can be executed after the second development performance is executed,
The chance-up effect execution means includes:
The chance-up effect can be executed so that the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the third suggestion effect is being executed is greater than the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the first suggestion effect is being executed,
The chance-up effect can be executed such that the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the fourth suggestion effect is executed is equal to or less than the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the second suggestion effect is executed,
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
After informing the player that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state as a result of the suggestive performance, a performance of a revival mode informing the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state can be executed;
When the fourth suggestion performance is executed after the second development performance is executed, the fourth suggestion performance does not execute a revival mode performance,
The first development performance includes an information display performance that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled by displaying information,
The information display performance includes a first information display performance that displays first information composed of a first number of pieces of information, and a second information display performance that can be executed after the first information display performance and that displays second information composed of a second number of pieces of information,
In the first information display performance, the first information can be divided into a plurality of pieces of information and sequentially displayed, and in the second information display performance, the second information can be divided into a plurality of pieces of information and sequentially displayed,
A display start mode when starting to display the first information in the first information display performance is different from a display start mode when starting to display the second information in the second information display performance,
When the presentation mode of the preview presentation is changed by the special presentation, there are a plurality of presentation modes after the change, and the proportion of the advantageous state controlled varies depending on which presentation mode is changed to.
It is characterized by:
Such a configuration can improve marketability.
The other gaming machine is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
a suggestion performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 18 ) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances including a special suggestion performance (for example, reach performance I) and a first suggestion performance (for example, reach performance A), a second suggestion performance (for example, reach performance B), a third suggestion performance (for example, reach performance F), and a fourth suggestion performance (for example, reach performance E) which have a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion performance;
a development performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance process during variable display shown in FIG. 18 ) capable of executing a special development performance as a first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestive performance is announced (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-8 , in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach η, a portion where a high expectation reach performance development announcement performance is executed from the execution of a reach performance A), and capable of executing a special development performance different from the special development performance as a second development pattern after it is announced that the second suggestive performance will not be controlled to the advantageous state as a performance result (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-8 , in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ζ, a portion where a reach performance E development announcement performance is executed after a variable display result (miss) is once announced as a performance result of a reach performance B);
a preview performance execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of preview performances (e.g., a performance that displays a title display in a predetermined mode, a performance that displays an active display in a predetermined mode, a dialogue performance that displays a dialogue display in a predetermined mode, a decorative pattern performance that displays a decorative pattern in a predetermined mode, etc.) that notify of the fact that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state and have different expectations depending on the performance mode; a special image display performance execution means capable of displaying a special image (e.g., a mini key image 030IWG10 and a key image 030IWG12); and a special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance (e.g., a chance-up performance that changes the display color of the active display from a normal color (white) to blue) that changes the preview performance being executed in one performance mode by using the displayed special image;
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the third suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the execution of reach effect A, and a reach effect F is further executed).
When the second development pattern is executed by the development performance execution means, the fourth suggestion performance can be executed after the special development performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-8, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach ζ, the variable display result (miss) is once notified as the performance result of the reach performance B, and then the reach performance E development notification performance is executed, and the reach performance E is further executed).
The performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-8 and FIG. 19-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance).
The special development effects include a first effect (e.g., a blackout effect shown in FIG. 19-10 and FIG. 19-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, a second effect (e.g., an early effect shown in FIG. 19-10 and FIG. 19-55) which is an effect executed after the first effect and in which early information is visibly displayed, and a tertiary effect (e.g., a late effect shown in FIG. 19-10 and FIG. 19-55) which is an effect executed after the second effect and in which late information with a higher degree of emphasis than the early information is visibly displayed,
The period from when the special development effect is executed to when it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state is shorter than the period from when the special development effect is executed to when it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figures 19-8 and 19-9, the length L13 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance F are set longer than the length L11 of the period from the start timing of the reach performance E development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance E (the notification timing of the variable display result)).
The special effect execution means displays a special corresponding image (e.g., a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11) when a preview effect is being executed, and executes a special effect in a manner in which the special image acts on the special corresponding image (e.g., displays a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to an active display AH or a decorative pattern, and executes a chance-up effect in a manner in which a key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 and rotates; see Figures 8-15 (9) to (15), Figures 8-17 (9) to 8-18 (17), etc.).
According to such a configuration, when a special performance using a special image is executed, the special image can be given a story-like quality, thereby enhancing the performance effect and increasing interest.
Furthermore, in the case where the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of a special development effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game caused by an excessively long period until it is notified that control will be entered into an advantageous state, and in the case where the special suggestion effect is executed after the execution of a special development effect, it is possible to preferably draw the player's attention to the special suggestion effect before it is notified that control will be entered into an advantageous state, thereby increasing interest in the game and improving marketability.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. An explanatory diagram showing examples of a jackpot determination table and a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 030IW. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern configuration and a breakdown of fluctuation time. FIG. This is a timing chart showing the execution timing of each performance during a super reach. An explanatory diagram showing the execution time of each performance in the first and second parts of the Super Reach. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stock effect pattern determination table. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance-up effect pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a title display change pattern determination table, an active display change pattern determination table, a dialogue display change pattern determination table, and a decorative design change pattern determination table. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a stock effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a stock effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing another specific example of the stock effect. An explanatory diagram showing an overview of the first and second parts of a super reach. An explanatory diagram showing an overview of the first and second parts of a super reach. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect for an active display. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect for an active display. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect targeting decorative symbols. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect targeting decorative symbols. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect targeting decorative symbols. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up promotion effect (fake). 13 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of keyhole (suggested) images and keyhole (real) images for each effect that is the target of the chance-up effect. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. This is a timing chart showing the performance period for each variation pattern. This is a timing chart showing the performance period for each variation pattern. This is a timing chart showing the performance period for each variation pattern. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing details of the presentation when a high expectation reach presentation development notification presentation is executed, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a comparison between the early and late presentations. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an image display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a data retention area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading preview performance setting process. A diagram showing whether or not a pre-reading preview performance is executed and the determination ratio of the display pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a meter effect determination process. 13A is a diagram showing whether or not a meter effect is executed and the decision ratio of the effect pattern, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram of each effect pattern. 11 is a timing chart showing the first to fifth timings in each fluctuation pattern. A flowchart showing an example of a reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a branch destination suggestion effect determination process. 13A is a diagram showing whether or not a branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the decision ratio of the effect pattern, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram of the effect pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process. (A) is a diagram showing the reach performance decision ratio when a jackpot is hit, (B) is a diagram showing the reach performance decision ratio when a miss is hit, (C) is a diagram showing a comparison between reach performance C and reach performance D, (D) is an explanatory diagram of the difference in the decision ratio between reach performance C and reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ and the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ when a jackpot is hit, and (E) is an explanatory diagram of the difference in the decision ratio between reach performance C and reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ and the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ when a miss is hit. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a chance-up effect determination process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of the period during which chance-up effects can be executed during each reach effect. 13 is an explanatory diagram of effects that can be executed as chance-up effects. FIG. (A) to (D) are figures showing whether or not a chance-up effect is executed in each reach effect and the presentation pattern, and (E) and (F) are explanatory diagrams of the presentation patterns of the chance-up effects in each reach effect. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an image display device according to a modified example. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating a change rate of the display mode of active display in a modified example. A figure showing whether or not a branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the determination rate of the effect pattern in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ in a modified example. A figure showing whether or not a chance-up effect is executed and the determination rate of the effect pattern in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ in a modified example. An explanatory diagram of the length of the revival performance in a modified example.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the play area), a first special pattern display device 4A and a second special pattern display device 4B are provided that perform a variable display (also called a special pattern game) of special patterns (also called special patterns) as multiple types of special identification information. Each of these is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special patterns are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The special patterns may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various presentation images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into a starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (to the left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the left of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A normal symbol pending display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal symbol pending memory count, which is the number of normal symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 1).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc., as described below), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that allow many prize balls to be obtained, and jackpot types that allow few or no prize balls to be obtained.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small prizes".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the above-mentioned specified number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed by sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and/or by turning on/off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, etc.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a look-ahead preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a look-ahead preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in Fig. 2. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, a power supply board, etc., are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on or not (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch in the on state, the output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the working area.

The CPU 103 also transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct initialization (step S9). When the presentation control CPU 120 receives the presentation control command, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply being stopped. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, etc. are executed. The data protection process includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, the status of various timers, etc.), as well as the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, a parity bit or a checksum is used to determine whether the data in RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, so an initialization process (step S8) is performed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (Step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (Step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a working area based on the memory contents of RAM 102 (contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbols were changing, the game control timer interrupt process described below is executed to resume the change of the special symbols from the state before the recovery.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In conjunction with this, a presentation control command specifying the backed-up game state before the power outage, or, if a special symbol game was being played, a presentation control command specifying the display result of the special symbol game being played may be transmitted. These commands can be the same as the commands transmitted and set in the special symbol process processing described below. When the presentation control CPU 120 receives a presentation control command specifying the time of recovery from the power outage, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that recovery from the power outage has been achieved or that recovery from the power outage is in progress. The presentation control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the presentation control command.

After completing the recovery or initialization process and sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

After executing such game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, by executing a predetermined information output processing, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the big win game state and the small win game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized (described in detail later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 4. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). In addition, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability of winning is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 6 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 7 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 6 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing a look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display a hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the presentation control process flag is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation control process flag is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process is ended.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 030IW)
Next, the characteristic feature 030IW of this embodiment will be described.

(Big hit determination table)
FIG. 8-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table and a variation pattern table. Among these, FIG. 8-1(A) is an example of a jackpot determination table used in this feature unit 030IW. As shown in FIG. 8-1(A), in this example, based on the hit determination random number, it is determined that the probability of a jackpot is about 1/300 in a low probability state, and that the probability of a jackpot is about 1/30 in a high probability state.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to that shown in FIG. 8-1(A), and the probability of winning may be different depending on whether the first special symbol changing display is executed or the second special symbol changing display is executed, for example.

In addition, for example, if the setting can be set to one of a number of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and a setting confirmation process or setting change process is executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, making it possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value, the probability of winning may differ depending on which setting value is set.

In addition, multiple types of jackpots may be provided, each with a different degree of advantage. Specifically, the number of rounds in the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game may be different depending on the jackpot type. In this case, when it is decided that a jackpot has occurred based on the hit determination random number, the type of jackpot is determined based on the type determination random number.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
8-1(B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 030IW. Of these, FIG. 8-1(B) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for misses. Also, FIG. 8-1(C) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for big wins. Note that the fluctuation pattern tables shown in FIG. 8-1(B) and (C) are both used in a low probability state. In a high probability state or a high base state, a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) with a different ratio of judgment values may be used.

In this example, as shown in Figure 8-1 (B), in the event of a miss, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach A), fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach B), fluctuation pattern PA2-4 (super reach A (with chance up)), and fluctuation pattern PA2-5 (super reach B (with chance up)).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-1(C), when a jackpot occurs, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PB2-2 (super reach A), fluctuation pattern PB2-3 (super reach B), fluctuation pattern PB2-4 (super reach A (with chance up)), and fluctuation pattern PB2-5 (super reach B (with chance up)).

In this example, during a super reach after a reach is achieved, a stock effect in which an item (in this example, a key) is stocked, and a chance up effect in which the stocked item (key) is used to change the presentation mode of other effects (i.e., to increase the likelihood of a jackpot suggested by other effects) can be executed. This configuration can increase interest during a super reach, and can also heighten the sense of anticipation for the stock effect and chance up effect. Hereinafter, executing a chance up effect using a stocked item (key) is also referred to as releasing the stocked item (key).

In this example, the super reach is a series of effects that unfold after the reach is established. When the effect control is performed based on the variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB2-2, and PB2-3 in which the chance up effect (and the stock effect) are not performed, there are two parts during the super reach: the first half of the super reach part A in which the pre-outpost effect that is the prelude to the battle effect is performed, and the second half of the super reach part in which the battle effect is performed. When the effect control is performed based on the variation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB2-4, and PB2-5 in which the chance up effect (and the stock effect) are performed, there are three parts during the super reach: the super reach introduction part in which the stock effect is performed, the first half of the super reach part B in which the pre-outpost effect and the chance up effect are performed, and the second half of the super reach part in which the battle effect is performed. With this configuration, the stock effect and the chance up effect are performed in the period before the battle effect, which is the climax of the super reach, so that the effect can be gradually heightened and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this example, as shown in Figures 8-1 (B) and (C), a Super Reach in which a Chance Up effect (and a Stock effect) is executed is configured to have a higher chance of winning than a Super Reach in which a Chance Up effect (and a Stock effect) is not executed, and furthermore, a Super Reach B is configured to have a higher chance of winning than a Super Reach A. This configuration creates anticipation as to whether a Chance Up effect (and a Stock effect) will be executed and in which Super Reach it will be executed.

In addition, the example is not limited to that shown in FIG. 8-1. For example, a variation pattern may be set in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed once or multiple times before a super reach, and the probability of a jackpot may differ depending on the number of pseudo consecutive performances.

Next, the configuration of each fluctuation pattern will be described. FIG. 8-2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the configuration of the fluctuation pattern and the breakdown of the fluctuation time. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the elements constituting the fluctuation pattern (which can also be said to be the performances executed in the fluctuation pattern) are "normal fluctuation" which performs a fluctuation display in a normal manner, "shortened fluctuation" which performs a fluctuation display in a manner that is shorter than the normal fluctuation, "normal reach" which performs a normal reach as a reach performance, "super reach introduction (stock performance)" which performs a stock performance in the super reach introduction part as a reach performance, "super reach first half A (no chance up performance)" which performs a pre-outpost performance in the super reach first half part A, "super reach first half B (with chance up performance)" which performs a pre-outpost performance and a chance up performance in the super reach first half part B, "super reach second half (battle performance)" which performs a battle performance in the super reach second half part, and "win celebration performance" which performs a win celebration performance to celebrate the big win. It should be noted that the examples shown in FIG. 8-2 are not limited to those shown, and other elements such as an element which performs a pseudo consecutive performance may be provided.

As shown in Figure 8-2, fluctuation pattern PA1-1 is a fluctuation pattern that deviates from normal fluctuation, includes "normal fluctuation" (15 seconds) as an element that constitutes the fluctuation pattern, and has a total fluctuation time of 15 seconds. Fluctuation pattern PA1-2 is a fluctuation pattern that deviates from shortening fluctuation, includes "shortening fluctuation" (5 seconds) as an element that constitutes the fluctuation pattern, and has a total fluctuation time of 5 seconds.

Fluctuating pattern PA2-1 is a fluctuation pattern that goes through a normal reach and then a miss, and includes a "normal reach" (20 seconds) as an element that constitutes the fluctuation pattern, with a total fluctuation time of 20 seconds.

Furthermore, the fluctuation patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3 are fluctuation patterns that go through the first half part A of the super reach where no chance-up effect is executed, and the second half part of the super reach, resulting in a miss. The elements that make up the fluctuation patterns include "first half A of the super reach (no chance-up effect)" (30 seconds) and "second half of the super reach (battle effect)" (40 seconds), and the total fluctuation time is 70 seconds.

Fluctuating patterns PA2-4 and PA2-5 are fluctuation patterns that go through the Super Reach introduction part, the Super Reach first half part B where the chance up effect is executed, and the Super Reach second half part, before ending in a miss. The elements that make up the fluctuation patterns include "Super Reach introduction (stock effect)" (30 seconds), "Super Reach first half B (with chance up effect)" (40 seconds), and "Super Reach second half (battle effect)" (40 seconds), with a total fluctuation time of 110 seconds.

Fluctuating pattern PB2-1 is a fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach leads to a jackpot, and the elements that make up the fluctuation pattern include a "normal reach" (20 seconds) and a "celebration effect when a win occurs" (20 seconds), with a total fluctuation time of 40 seconds.

Furthermore, the fluctuation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3 are fluctuation patterns that go through the first half of the Super Reach A where no chance up effect is executed, and the second half of the Super Reach, before a jackpot. The elements that make up the fluctuation patterns include the "first half of the Super Reach A (no chance up effect)" (30 seconds), the "second half of the Super Reach (battle effect)" (40 seconds), and the "celebration effect when a hit occurs" (20 seconds), and the total fluctuation time is 90 seconds.

Furthermore, the fluctuation patterns PB2-4 and PB2-5 are fluctuation patterns that result in a jackpot after passing through the Super Reach introduction part, the Super Reach first half part B where the chance up effect is executed, and the Super Reach second half part, and the elements that make up the fluctuation patterns include "Super Reach introduction (stock effect)" (30 seconds), "Super Reach first half B (with chance up effect)" (40 seconds), "Super Reach second half (battle effect)" (40 seconds), and "Hit celebration effect" (20 seconds), with a total fluctuation time of 130 seconds.

In the example shown in Figure 8-2, the performance times of the first half and second half of the Super Reach are the same for Super Reach A and Super Reach B, but this configuration is not limited to this, and the performance times may be different depending on the type of Super Reach.

(The timing of each performance during the Super Reach)
Next, the execution timing of the stock effect and the chance-up effect will be described. FIG. 8-3 is a timing chart showing an example of the execution timing of each effect.

In this example, the fluctuation time (which can also be said to be the total performance execution time) is determined by the fluctuation pattern determined on the main board 11 side, and the execution timing and performance execution time of the stock performance and chance up performance are determined based on the fluctuation pattern on the performance control board 12 side. However, as will be described in detail later, depending on the type of performance, the execution timing may be predetermined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Note that, without being limited to the configuration of this example, a fluctuation pattern may be set in which the execution timing and performance execution time of the stock performance and chance up performance are predetermined, and one of the fluctuation patterns may be determined on the main board 11 side.

Figure 8-3 (A) shows a case where a super reach without chance up is executed. In this case, as shown in Figure 8-3 (A), a pre-outpost performance is executed in the first half part A of the super reach, and a battle performance is executed in the second half part of the super reach.

Figure 8-3 (B) shows a case where a super reach with chance up is executed. In this case, a stock effect is executed first in the super reach introductory part. Then, in the first half part B of the super reach, a chance up effect is executed together with an outpost effect. Then, in the second half part of the super reach, a battle effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-3(B), in this example, there are three opportunities to stock items (keys) at a maximum of three timings, A to C, during the stock effect (timings (A) to (C) shown in FIG. 8-3(B)). Note that in this example, there are three timings at a maximum as opportunities to stock items (keys) during the stock effect, but this is not limited to the above configuration, and there may be a maximum of two or less, or four or more.

In addition, in this example, the title display (a presentation that displays a title display), active display (a presentation that displays an active display), dialogue display (a dialogue presentation that displays a dialogue display), and decorative pattern (a decorative pattern presentation that displays a decorative pattern) in the first half of the Super Reach each suggest different odds of a jackpot depending on the presentation mode, and are configured so that when the corresponding chance-up presentation is executed, the presentation mode changes (i.e., the suggested odds of a jackpot increase).

Specifically, when one item (key) is stocked in the stock performance, a chance-up performance is executed once for any of the title display (performance that displays the title display), active display (performance that displays the active display), dialogue display (speech performance that displays the dialogue display), and decorative pattern (decorative pattern performance that displays the decorative pattern); when two items (keys) are stocked in the stock performance, a chance-up performance is executed once for each of two of the title display (performance that displays the title display), active display (performance that displays the active display), dialogue display (speech performance that displays the dialogue display), and decorative pattern (decorative pattern performance that displays the decorative pattern); when three items (keys) are stocked in the stock performance, a chance-up performance is executed once for each of three of the title display (performance that displays the title display), active display (performance that displays the active display), dialogue display (speech performance that displays the dialogue display), and decorative pattern (decorative pattern performance that displays the decorative pattern). Note that this is not limited to the configuration of this example, and chance-up performance may be executed multiple times for one performance. In this case, each time a chance-up effect is performed, a stocked item (key) is released.

As shown in FIG. 8-3(B), in this example, first to fifth timings (timings (1) to (5) shown in FIG. 8-3(B)) are provided as timings at which chance-up effects can be executed in the first half of the super reach. Note that in this example, the first to fifth timings in the first half of the super reach are determined for each variation pattern (or each type of super reach), but they may be common timings for all variation patterns (or types of super reach).

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), the chance-up effect targeting the title display (the effect that displays the title display) can be executed at the first timing, the chance-up effect targeting the active display (the effect that displays the active display) can be executed at the second or fourth timing, the chance-up effect targeting the dialogue display (the dialogue effect that displays the dialogue display) can be executed at the third timing, and the chance-up effect targeting the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern) can be executed at the fifth timing.

Whether the chance-up effect targeting the active display (effect that displays the active display) is executed at the second timing or the fourth timing is determined by lottery. On the other hand, the timing at which the chance-up effect targeting the title display (effect that displays the title display), the dialogue display (dialogue effect that displays the dialogue display), or the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern) is executed is fixedly determined for each variation pattern. Note that this configuration is not limited to the above, and the timing at which the chance-up effect targeting the active display (effect that displays the active display) is executed may be fixedly determined, or the timing at which the chance-up effect targeting the title display (effect that displays the title display), the dialogue display (dialogue effect that displays the dialogue display), or the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern) is executed may be determined by lottery to be one of a plurality of timings.

The execution order of the effects that are the subject of the Chance Up Effects is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-3, and may be other orders. However, it is desirable that the later the order that the effect is the subject of the Chance Up Effects, the more likely it is that the Chance Up Effects will increase the likelihood of a jackpot (for example, the more likely it is that the effect will change to one with a higher chance of a jackpot). This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the timing at which the Chance Up Effects will be executed, and prevents players who have high hopes for the timing of the change (for example, their hopes grow as the first half of the Super Reach progresses) from being disappointed.

In this example, when the chance up performance is executed during the super reach, the stock performance is always executed, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a pattern in which the chance up performance is executed without the stock performance may also exist. In this case, for example, a variation pattern including the stock performance and the chance up performance and a variation pattern including the chance up performance without the stock performance are provided in advance, and when the main board 11 side determines the former variation pattern, the performance control board 12 side determines the performance contents of the stock performance and the chance up performance according to the modes shown in Figures 8-5 to 8-8 described later based on the determined variation pattern, and when the main board 11 side determines the latter variation pattern, the performance control board 12 side determines whether or not to execute the chance up performance and the type of chance up performance to be executed based on the determined variation pattern. In this way, by providing a pattern in which the chance up performance is executed without the stock performance, the presence of the chance up performance is increased, and the player can enjoy the performance with a sense of superiority in a situation in which the chance up performance is visualized to be executed in the future. Furthermore, in such cases, the system may be configured so that the probability of a large number of chance-up effects being executed is higher when the stock effect is executed in advance than when it is not executed (i.e., the chance-up effect is configured to increase the likelihood of a big win), giving priority to the execution of the stock effect and creating anticipation for the execution of the stock effect.

In addition, in this example, in a super reach, there is always a first half part of the super reach and a second half part of the super reach, but this is not limited to the configuration. For example, when a stock effect is executed, the first half part of the super reach can be omitted, and the second half part of the super reach can follow the super reach introduction part, and a chance-up effect can be executed in the second half part. This configuration can prevent the total effect execution time of a reach with high expectations from becoming too long.

When providing an exceptional pattern in which the first half of the super reach is omitted, in the basic pattern that is not omitted, it is desirable that when the first half of the super reach develops into the second half of the super reach, other performance images are displayed in a manner that covers all the performance images related to the super reach at the boundary between the first and second halves, or that the performance contents are clearly divided between the first and second halves. For example, at the boundary between the first and second halves, an effect image or character related to the chance up performance shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) described later, or an image such as the text display of "Pending Rank Up" may be displayed in a manner that covers all the performance images related to the super reach. Also, for example, the performance contents may be divided by executing an outpost performance in the first half and executing a battle performance in the second half, or the performance contents may be divided by displaying a battle scene in the first half and a conclusion scene such as a character unleashing a special move in the second half. By doing so, even when the first half of the super reach is omitted, the flow of the performance can be made natural.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-3, for convenience, the intervals between the timing of stocking and the timing of the chance-up effect are uniform, but they do not have to be uniform and can be any timing within the period.

(Execution time of each performance in Super Reach)
Next, the execution time of each effect in the super reach will be described. FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution time of each effect in the first half and the second half of the super reach.

Of the examples shown in Figure 8-4, Figure 8-4 (A) shows an example in which a chance up effect is executed for the title display (a performance that displays the title display) at the first timing (timing (1) shown in Figure 8-4) of the first half of the super reach, a chance up effect is executed for the dialogue display (a dialogue performance that displays the dialogue display) at the third timing (timing (3) shown in Figure 8-4), and a chance up effect is executed for the decorative pattern (a decorative pattern performance that displays a decorative pattern) at the fifth timing (timing (5) shown in Figure 8-4) (corresponding to the eighth performance pattern of the chance up effect described below).

In addition, Figure 8-4 (B) shows an example in which a chance-up effect is executed for the title display (a performance that displays the title display) at the first timing of the first half of the super reach, and a chance-up effect is executed for the decorative pattern (a decorative pattern performance that displays a decorative pattern) at the fifth timing (corresponding to the seventh performance pattern of the chance-up effect described below).

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4, in the latter part of the super reach, a moving body effect is executed in which the moving body 32 operates before the fluctuation ends (for example, when announcing that control is being given to a jackpot).

In this example, as shown in the case where a dialogue effect without a chance-up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-4(A) and the case where a dialogue effect with a chance-up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect is configured to have a longer execution time when the effect mode changes due to the chance-up effect than when the effect mode does not change due to the chance-up effect. Specifically, the effect execution time T11 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is longer than the effect execution time T12 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. 8-4(B). With this configuration, when the chance-up effect is executed, a period for executing the chance-up effect and its target effect (for example, a period for announcing the change and the effect mode after the change) can be secured.

If the performance execution time of a performance were to change depending on whether or not a Chance Up performance is present, this would affect the execution timing of other performances, which could increase the amount of data related to performance control and complicate processing. Also, because the variable time (i.e. the total performance execution time) is fixedly determined in advance for each variable pattern, there is a risk that the performance will not fit within the time limit, or that there will be excess time. Therefore, in this example, the execution period of the movable body performance is made different depending on whether or not a Chance Up performance is present, thereby minimizing the impact on other performances and ensuring that all performances fit within the time limit without feeling unnatural.

In other words, in this example, the performance execution time T11 of the dialogue performance shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is longer than the performance execution time T12 of the dialogue performance shown in FIG. 8-4(B), while the performance execution time T21 of the movable body performance shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is shorter than the performance execution time T12 of the movable body performance shown in FIG. 8-4(B). And, the performance execution time of the chance-up performance targeting the decorative pattern (decorative pattern performance that displays decorative patterns) is the same.

For example, the movable body performance is controlled by moving the movable body 32 from the initial position to a performance position in front of the display area of the image display device 5 and keeping it at that performance position for a predetermined period of time, and controlling the image display device 5 to display an effect image or the like during the predetermined period to emphasize the movable body performance (at this time, the movable body 32 itself may be made to operate at the performance position), and then controlling the movable body 32 to move from the performance position to the initial position. In this way, the performance execution time of the movable body performance can be adjusted by lengthening or shortening the period during which the movable body 32 is at the performance position. By adjusting the performance execution time of the movable body performance in this way, it is possible to respond to small changes in the performance time depending on whether or not there is a chance up. With this configuration, while the performance execution time of the performance changes depending on whether or not there is a chance up performance, it is possible to prevent the amount of data related to the performance control from increasing and the processing from becoming complicated, and to fit all the performances within the time without any sense of incongruity.

The adjustment of the presentation time may be performed, for example, by a presentation other than the moving body presentation. For example, if the variable display result is a miss and the moving body presentation is not executed before the end of the change, the presentation image related to the super reach may be returned to the normal background image before the end of the change, and then the time for which the decorative pattern indicating a miss is temporarily stopped may be lengthened or shortened to adjust the time.

In this example, the chance-up effect can be executed multiple times, and the execution time is configured to differ depending on the chance-up effect being executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), chance-up effects that target decorative symbols have a longer execution time than chance-up effects that target title displays or dialogue displays. Although details will be described later, chance-up effects that target decorative symbols have a higher chance of winning than chance-up effects that target title displays or dialogue displays, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced by extending the execution time. With this configuration, various chance-up effects can be executed with suitable execution times, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this example, when one chance-up effect targeting one effect is being executed, other chance-up effects targeting other effects are not executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, chance-up effects with different targets are executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the chance-up effect being executed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-5 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads out the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 030IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read out in step 030IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 030IWS802). That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step 030IWS802, thereby realizing a display result determination means that determines the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop pattern of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. In addition, when a pseudo-series is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 also determines, in step 030IWS802, a chance eye pattern as a provisional stop pattern during the pseudo-series (for example, a combination of patterns that is one pattern away from the jackpot pattern, such as "223" or "445", which is not a reach but is not a jackpot pattern, or a combination of patterns in which the middle pattern is a special pattern exclusive to pseudo-series (a pattern in which letters such as "NEXT" are written, but no numbers are written, and which cannot form a jackpot combination)). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. In addition, in step 030IWS802, the performance control CPU 120 may determine whether or not a jackpot is reached based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern based only on the variation pattern command.

In the case of a "miss", a combination of decorative symbols other than those mentioned above is determined. However, if a reach performance is involved, a combination of decorative symbols where the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined. Also, even if there is a miss, if it is a "time-saving miss", a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. Note that the system may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond symbol) depending on the type of time-saving.

The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative patterns is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping pattern is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variation pattern includes a super reach (with chance up) (step 030IWS803). If the variation pattern does not include a super reach (with chance up), the process proceeds to step 030IWS811.

If the variation pattern includes a super reach (with chance up), the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance pattern of the stock performance (step 030IWS804). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance pattern of the chance up performance (step 030IWS805). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance mode after the change of the performance that is the target of the chance up performance (step 030IWS806). After that, the process proceeds to step 030IWS811. Details of steps 030IWS804, S805, and S806 will be described later.

In step 030IWS811, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern and the determined content of the performance (step 030IWS811).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 030IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data is set that the performance control CPU 120 refers to when controlling the performance device. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (performance parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data that is a collection of multiple combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating the manner of change that constitutes the change manner during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is included. In addition, the process timer setting value is set to the change time for that change manner. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display of the decorative pattern in the change manner set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. In addition, the process table is stored in the ROM in the performance control board 80. In addition, a process table is prepared according to each change pattern.

The process table used when controlling the performance of a variation pattern involving a reach performance has process data set therein which indicates that the left pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and that the right pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a further predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, instead of setting the pattern to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the pattern may be generated by synthesizing according to the determined stopping pattern, or the provisional stopping pattern in the pseudo consecutive or sliding performance.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 030IWS813). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

Step 030: By executing the processing of IWS813, a performance is realized according to the variation pattern and the content decided to be executed.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 030IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 030IWS815).

Next, we will explain the details of the process for determining the stock effect pattern in the variable display start setting process (step 030IWS804).

In step 030IWS804, the stock effect pattern is determined, for example, by referring to the stock effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 8-6 (A) to (B).

Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern is Super Reach A (with chance up) fluctuation pattern PA2-4 or PB2-4, the first stock performance pattern determination table (Super Reach A) shown in Figure 8-6 (A) is referenced to determine the first performance pattern in which one item (key) is stocked as the performance result, or one of the second and third performance patterns in which two items (keys) are stocked as the performance result.

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PA2-5 or PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with chance up), the second stock performance pattern determination table (Super Reach B) shown in Figure 8-6 (B) is referenced to determine the first performance pattern in which one item (key) is stocked as the performance result, the second or third performance pattern in which two items (keys) are stocked as the performance result, or the fourth or fifth performance pattern in which three items (keys) are stocked as the performance result.

In this example, as shown in Figures 8-3 and 8-6, there are opportunities to stock items (keys) at timing A, timing B, and timing C during the stock performance. For example, in the first performance pattern, one item (key) is stocked at timing A, and no items (keys) are stocked at timing B and timing C. Also, for example, in the fifth performance pattern, one item (key) is stocked at timing A, no items (keys) are stocked at timing B, and two items (keys) are stocked at timing C. In this way, in this example, there are opportunities to stock one or multiple items (keys) at each timing.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 8-6 (A) to (B), each performance pattern of the stock performance is configured to have a different probability of being determined at the time of a jackpot. In other words, the expected probability of a jackpot is configured to differ depending on the number of items (keys) stocked and the timing of stocking. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the performance patterns of the stock performance.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 8-6 (A) to (B), the display patterns of the stock effects that can be determined are different for Super Reach A and Super Reach B. Specifically, in Super Reach A, a maximum of two items (keys) can be stocked, and in Super Reach B, a maximum of three items (keys) can be stocked. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to which type of Super Reach will result in the stock effect.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 8-6 (A) to (B), the game is configured so that an item (key) is stocked at timing A regardless of the presentation pattern (in other words, when the stock presentation is executed, at least one item (key) is stocked). This configuration can prevent the player from losing all expectations about the stock presentation or losing interest in the stock presentation due to cases where an item is not stocked even when the stock presentation is executed.

In this example, the probability of a big win is higher when the stock effect is executed than when it is not executed, so the player will be looking forward to the occurrence of the stock effect. Therefore, for example, in the normal reach before the start of the super reach (the state in which the left and right symbols are ready and the middle symbol is changing on the image display device 5), a symbol that suggests that the stock effect will be executed or a symbol that teases whether it will be executed or not may be executed. For example, when the stock effect is executed, in the normal reach state, a special symbol such as a "key stock time symbol" may be stopped as the middle symbol to transition to the stock effect. Also, for example, when the stock effect is executed, in the normal reach state, the middle symbol may start to change at high speed, and after the screen changes to the super reach (covering the display area of the image display device 5 by whiteout, etc.), the transition may be made to the stock effect instead of the first half part of the super reach (outpost effect).

Next, we will explain the details of the process (step 030IWS805) that determines the presentation pattern for the chance-up presentation in the variable display start setting process.

In step 030IWS805, for example, the chance-up effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 8-7 (A) to (E) is referenced to determine the chance-up effect pattern.

Specifically, if the fluctuation pattern is one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-4 or PB2-4 of Super Reach A (with Chance Up) and the number of items stocked determined in step 030IWS804 is 1, the first chance up performance pattern determination table (Super Reach A: 1 chance up) shown in Figure 8-7 (A) is referenced to determine one of the first to third performance patterns that will perform the chance up performance once.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-4 or PB2-4 of Super Reach A (with Chance Up) and the number of items stocked determined in step 030IWS804 is 2, the second chance up performance pattern determination table (Super Reach A: Chance Up twice) shown in Figure 8-7 (B) is referenced to determine one of the fifth to sixth performance patterns in which the chance up performance is performed twice.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-5 or PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with Chance Up) and the number of items stocked determined in step 030IWS804 is 1, the third chance up performance pattern determination table (Super Reach B: 1 chance up) shown in Figure 8-7 (C) is referenced to determine one of the first to fourth performance patterns that will perform the chance up performance once.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-5 or PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with Chance Up) and the number of items stocked determined in step 030IWS804 is 2, the fourth chance up performance pattern determination table (Super Reach B: Chance Up twice) shown in Figure 8-7 (D) is referenced to determine one of the fifth to seventh performance patterns in which the chance up performance is performed twice.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is either of the fluctuation patterns PA2-5 or PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with Chance Up) and the number of items stocked determined in step 030IWS804 is 3, the 5th chance up performance pattern determination table (Super Reach B: Chance Up 3 times) shown in Figure 8-7 (E) is referenced to determine the 8th performance pattern in which the chance up performance is performed 3 times.

For example, in the first presentation pattern of the chance-up presentation, a chance-up presentation that changes the presentation mode of the title display (presentation that displays the title display) is executed once. Also, for example, in the eighth presentation pattern of the chance-up presentation, a chance-up presentation that changes the presentation mode of the title display (presentation that displays the title display), a chance-up presentation that changes the presentation mode of the dialogue display (dialogue presentation that displays the dialogue display), and a chance-up presentation that changes the presentation mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern presentation that displays a decorative pattern) are each executed.

In this example, before the chance-up effect is executed, a chance-up prompting effect is executed to prompt whether or not the chance-up effect will be executed. There are chance-up prompting effects in which the chance-up effect is executed after the effect and those in which it is not executed, and when distinguishing between the two, the former are also called chance-up prompting effects (true) and the latter chance-up prompting effects (false).

In the chance-up teasing performance (true), an image suggesting a keyhole corresponding to a stocked item (key) (e.g., keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13) is displayed, and then an image showing a keyhole (e.g., keyhole (real) image 030IWG11) is displayed. On the other hand, in the chance-up teasing performance (false), an image suggesting a keyhole corresponding to a stocked item (key) (e.g., keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13) is displayed, and then an image showing a keyhole (e.g., keyhole (real) image 030IWG11) is not displayed, and the image suggesting a keyhole (e.g., keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13) is erased.

In this example, a chance-up teasing effect (true) is always executed before a chance-up effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-7, for example, in the fourth and seventh chance-up effect patterns, a chance-up teasing effect (false) is executed that teases whether or not a chance-up effect targeting a dialogue display (a dialogue effect that displays a dialogue display) will be executed, but which ultimately will not be executed. This configuration allows the player to pay attention to which effect the chance-up effect will be executed. Note that, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-7, a chance-up teasing effect (false) may be executed when a chance-up effect is not executed and there are still stocked items (keys) remaining.

In this example, as shown in Figures 8-7 (A) to (E), each presentation pattern of the chance-up effects is configured to have a different probability of being determined at the time of a jackpot (i.e., different jackpot expectation). This configuration allows players to focus on the presentation pattern of the chance-up effects. In particular, the later the timing of the change that is the subject of the chance-up effects (i.e., in the order of decorative pattern change > dialogue display change > title display change), the higher the jackpot expectation. This configuration allows players to focus on which chance-up effects are executed at which timing.

In addition, in this example, the chance-up effect, which changes the presentation mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern presentation that displays decorative patterns), is not executed during Super Reach A, but is configured to be executable only during Super Reach B. This configuration allows you to pay attention to which type of Super Reach the chance-up effect is executed during.

It should be noted that the presenter may be configured to be able to execute a chance-up effect that changes the presentation mode of the decorative symbol (decorative symbol presentation that displays a decorative symbol) during any type of super reach, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-7. In addition, in this example, the presenter is configured to execute a maximum of three chance-up effects, but the presenter is not limited to this configuration and may execute a maximum of four chance-up effects corresponding to all possible target effects, or may execute a chance-up effect targeting the active display at both the second and fourth timings, so that a maximum of five chance-up effects can be executed.

Next, we will explain the details of the process (step 030IWS806) that determines the presentation mode after the change in the presentation that is the target of the chance-up presentation in the variable display start setting process.

In step 030IWS806, if it is determined to execute a chance-up effect that changes the presentation mode of the title display (presentation that displays the title display), the change pattern is determined by referring to the title display change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(A). If it is determined to execute a chance-up effect that changes the presentation mode of the active display (presentation that displays the active display), the change pattern is determined by referring to the active display change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(B). If it is determined to execute a chance-up effect that changes the presentation mode of the dialogue display (dialogue presentation that displays the dialogue display), the change pattern is determined by referring to the dialogue display change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(C). If it is determined to execute a chance-up effect that changes the presentation mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern presentation that displays the decorative pattern), the change pattern is determined by referring to the decorative pattern change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(D).

In this example, the title display (a presentation that displays the title display), active display (a presentation that displays the active display), dialogue display (a dialogue presentation that displays the dialogue display) and decorative pattern (a decorative pattern presentation that displays a decorative pattern) are configured so that the color tone of the presentation image related to the presentation suggests the likelihood of a jackpot. For example, the following colors are configured to suggest the highest likelihood of a jackpot: gold > red > green > blue > normal color (white).

When the first change pattern is selected as the title display change pattern, the title display changes from the normal color (white) to blue, and when the second change pattern is selected, the title display changes from the normal color (white) to green.

In addition, if the first change pattern is determined as the active display change pattern, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to blue at the first timing of the first half of the super reach, if the second change pattern is determined, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to green at the first timing, if the third change pattern is determined, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to green at the third timing, and if the fourth change pattern is determined, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to red at the third timing.

In addition, if it is possible to execute a look-ahead preview effect that changes the pending display (and the active display), a chance-up effect targeting the active display may be executed according to the performance pattern (for example, the timing of the change and the display state after the change are determined) that is determined as the look-ahead preview effect at the time of the initial winning.

When the first change pattern is determined as the change pattern for the dialogue display, the dialogue display changes from the normal color (white) to blue, when the second change pattern is determined, the dialogue display changes from the normal color (white) to green, and when the third change pattern is determined, the dialogue display changes from the normal color (white) to red.

In addition, if the change pattern of the decorative design is determined to be the first change pattern, the decorative design will change from the normal color (white) to green, if the second change pattern is determined, the decorative design will change from the normal color (white) to red, and if the third change pattern is determined, the decorative design will change from the normal color (white) to gold.

In this example, when the presentation mode of the target presentation changes due to the chance-up presentation, the tendency of the presentation mode after the change is configured to differ depending on the timing of the change. Specifically, the chance-up presentation targeted at the active display is configured to be more likely to change to a presentation mode with a higher expectation at the third timing, which is later than the first timing. Also, the chance-up presentation targeted at the decorative pattern is configured to be executed later and to be more likely to change to a presentation mode with a higher expectation than the chance-up presentation targeted at the title display, active display, or dialogue display. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the timing at which the chance-up presentation will be executed, and to prevent disappointment for players who have high expectations for the timing of the change (for example, expectations grow as the first half of the super reach progresses).

In addition, if the color displayed after the change at an earlier timing suggests a higher expectation level than the color displayed after the change at a later timing, the presentation mode (color) displayed after the change at the later timing may be re-determined so that a drop in expectation level does not occur.

(Example of performance)
Next, a specific example of the Super Reach effect including the stock effect and the chance up effect will be described. Figures 8-9 to 8-10 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of the stock effect. In Figures 8-9 to 8-10, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

(Stock effect (fifth effect pattern))
Figures 8-9 to 8-10 show the stock presentation of the fifth presentation pattern, in which one item (key) is stocked at timing A, no item (key) is stocked at timing B, and two items (keys) are stocked at timing C.

Specifically, when the variable display starts and a reach is achieved, a decorative pattern showing "6" is displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R of the image display device 5. Then, when the stock performance starts, the title display of the stock performance, "Key Stock" and "TIME", is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (1). Note that the display mode of the title display may suggest the number of items (keys) to be stocked in the stock performance that starts later, or that a large number of items (keys) will be stocked. For example, the title display is generally displayed in a normal color (white), but when it is displayed in red, it may suggest that a larger number of items (keys) will be stocked than when it is displayed in a normal color (white).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (1), except during special effects, the active display AH is displayed as the active display in the lower left part of the display area of the image display device 5, and the small symbol KZ corresponding to the special symbol and the reserved memory number HS indicating the number of reserved memories are displayed in the center right part of the display area of the image display device 5.

Next, when the stock effect starts, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), a timer image 030IWG01 indicating the remaining time of the stock effect and a "Key Stock Time" display 030IWG02 indicating that the stock effect is in progress are displayed. Furthermore, when timing A of the stock effect arrives, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), character A prompting the user to press push button 31B, the valid operation period, and an image resembling push button 31B are displayed.

In the stock effect of the fifth effect pattern, one key is stocked at timing A, so when a press of push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period (or when the valid operation period has elapsed), as shown in Figure 8-9 (3), the text display "Stock x 1" indicating that one key has been stocked as an item, an image resembling a key, and an effect image emphasizing them are displayed in a manner that covers the background image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (4), a visual effect is displayed in which one key moves from the top left to the bottom right of the screen of the image display device and is stored (for example, a display in which it appears as if the key is flying in from the back left of the screen and being stored in the front right of the screen).

When the display showing the keys being stocked ends, a display showing the progress of the stock display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (5). Specifically, a display showing character A riding a swing is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the remaining time shown in the timer image 030IWG01 is displayed decreasing. At this time, a stock key image 030G03 is also displayed, showing the number of keys currently stocked.

Next, at timing B of the stock effect, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (6), character A is displayed to prompt the player to press push button 31B, along with an image of the valid operation period and push button 31B. Note that in this example, a display prompting the player to press push button 31B is displayed at timings A, B, and C of the stock effect, and character A's pose is configured to be different for each. Therefore, even if the display prompting the player to press the push button is displayed multiple times, the player's interest can be increased at each timing without becoming bored.

In the stock presentation of the fifth presentation pattern, keys are not stocked at timing B, so when a press of push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period (or when the valid operation period has elapsed), as shown in FIG. 8-9 (7), an image of a close-up of character A's face, the character "!?", and an effect image that emphasizes them are displayed in a manner that covers the background image, and no image indicating that keys will be stocked is displayed.

In this way, by executing an effect in which a character image is displayed instead of a key when no keys are stocked, the disappointment of not being able to stock a key can be reduced. In addition, in the stock effect of this example, even if only one key is stocked, the effect execution time is the same as when three keys are stocked. Therefore, if there is a period of time when no keys are stocked even when the button is pressed, the effect may become redundant and interest may decrease. Therefore, by displaying a character image instead of a key when no keys are stocked in this way to liven up the effect, the stock effect does not lose excitement even when the number of keys stocked is small. Note that the character image displayed when no keys are stocked does not have to be of one type, but may be different depending on the type of super reach being executed. In this way, future developments can be predicted by the displayed character image, and the character image can be given a meaning in terms of the effect.

The effect display shown in FIG. 8-9(7) is performed when no keys are stocked (i.e., indicates that no keys are stocked), so after the image displayed in the effect display shown in FIG. 8-9(7) is erased, the effect display shown in FIG. 8-9(8) is displayed in which the stock effect progresses, but the number of stocked keys indicated by the stock key image 030G03 does not increase. Note that the display period for the effect display when an item is stocked shown in FIG. 8-9(3) is set shorter than the display period for the effect display when an item is not stocked shown in FIG. 8-9(7). This configuration makes it possible to prevent players from feeling annoyed or losing interest by displaying undesirable effects for a long time without the effect of increasing the number of stocks.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (9), a display showing the progress of the stock effect is displayed, and when timing C of the stock effect arrives, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (10), character A prompting the player to press push button 31B, the valid operation period, and an image resembling push button 31B are displayed.

In the stock effect of the fifth effect pattern, two keys are stocked at timing C, so when a press of push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period (or when the valid operation period has elapsed), as shown in Figure 8-10 (11), the text display "Stock x 2" indicating that two keys have been stocked as items, an image resembling a key, and an effect image emphasizing them are displayed in a manner that covers the background image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (12), an effect display is performed in which two keys move from the top left to the bottom right of the screen of the image display device and are stored (for example, a display in which the keys appear to fly in from the back left of the screen and be stored in the front right of the screen).

When the display showing the stocking of keys ends, a display showing the progress of the stocking display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (13). Then, when the remaining time shown in timer image 030IWG01 reaches 0, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (14), a display prompting the user to press push button 31B is displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (15).

Then, when a press of the push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period (or when the valid operation period has elapsed), as shown in FIG. 8-10 (16), the text display "Character A VS Enemy Character B" indicating the battle cards in the battle performance, as well as Character A and Enemy Character B, are displayed, and the stock performance ends.

In this example, when a super reach with chance up is executed, a stock effect is first executed in the super reach introductory part. Then, in the first half of the super reach, a prelude effect such as a dialogue effect in which character A and enemy character B face each other and talk is executed primarily, and a chance up effect is executed incidentally. After that, in the second half of the super reach, a battle effect in which character A and enemy character B cross swords is executed. Note that, when a super reach without chance up is executed, a prelude effect such as a dialogue effect in which character A and enemy character B face each other and talk is executed in the first half of the super reach, and a battle effect in which character A and enemy character B cross swords is executed in the second half of the super reach.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-10 (16), the match card for the battle performance is "character A vs. enemy character B", but in reality, multiple types of match cards (different types of friendly and enemy characters) are provided, and the match card is determined according to the type of super reach. That is, the pressing of the push button 31B triggers the display of the match card for the battle performance, thereby announcing the type of super reach. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation and tension when the push button 31B is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 8-10 (15). For example, in addition to or instead of the type of super reach, the types of friendly and enemy characters may be different depending on the expectation of a jackpot. Also, for example, if the performance stage is configured to transition depending on the game period or game state, such as the number of changes, a character previously associated with the performance stage may be made to fight against one of the enemy characters (which may be one of multiple enemy characters previously associated with the performance stage, or may be an enemy character determined by lottery).

(Stock effect (first effect pattern))
Next, we will explain the stock presentation of the first presentation pattern in which one item (key) is stocked at timing A, and no item (key) is stocked at timing B and timing C, resulting in one key being stocked.

When the stock effect of the first effect pattern is executed, after the screen transitions of Figures 8-9 (1) to (8), a stock key image 030G03 indicating that there is one stocked key is displayed as shown in Figure 8-11 (9), and an effect display showing the progress of the stock effect is displayed. Then, as shown in Figure 8-11 (10), when the remaining time shown in the timer image 030IWG01 reaches 0, a display is displayed encouraging the user to press the push button 31B as shown in Figure 8-11 (11).

When a press of the push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period (or when the valid operation period has elapsed), as shown in FIG. 8-11 (12), the text display "Character A VS Enemy Character B" indicating the battle cards in the battle performance, as well as Character A and Enemy Character B, are displayed, and the stock performance ends.

(Overview of the first and second half of Super Reach)
Next, an overview of the effects in the first and second parts of the Super Reach will be explained. Figures 8-12 to 8-13 are explanatory diagrams showing an overview of the effects in the first and second parts of the Super Reach. In Figures 8-12 to 8-13, the effects screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

When the Super Reach introductory part (stock effect) ends and the first half of the Super Reach begins, the title of Super Reach B, "A Deadly Battle Between Two People," is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-12 (1).

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (1), a mini character A image 030IWC10 and a mini key image 030IWG10 representing the number of keys stocked in the stock effect are displayed in the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5. In this example, it is assumed that three keys have been stocked in advance in the stock effect, and the three keys are displayed in a manner that moves around the mini character A. Note that in this example, the keys stocked in the stock effect of the super reach introduction part are displayed as a mini key image 030IWG10 or a key image 030IWG12 in the first half of the super reach.

In addition, a decorative pattern indicating "6" is displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R of the image display device 5, and an active display AH is displayed at the lower left side of the display area of the image display device 5 as an active display, and a small pattern KZ corresponding to the special pattern and a reserved memory number HS indicating the number of reserved memories are displayed at the center right side of the display area of the image display device 5.

Next, as a prelude, as shown in FIG. 8-12(2), character A image 030IWC01 and enemy character A image 030IWC02 face each other, and after that, as shown in FIG. 8-12(3), line image 030IWG20 is displayed saying "I'll kill you!"

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (4), character A image 030IWC01 is displayed alone, along with a line image 030IWG20 saying "I won't go easy on you."

As shown in Figures 8-12 (2) to (4), when the prelude effect is being executed and the chance-up effect is not being executed, an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10.

When a chance-up effect targeting a dialogue effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (5), a keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 resembling a keyhole is displayed overlapping the dialogue image 030IWG20. Also at this time, a mini-character A image 030IWC10 holding a key is displayed next to the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11. This type of effect display indicates that the target of the chance-up effect is a dialogue effect.

Next, to display the effect of the key being inserted into the keyhole, the key image 030IWG12 and keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-12 (6), and then, to display the effect of the key turning in the keyhole (i.e., the lock being opened), the key image 030IWG12 rotated in the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-12 (7).

When the effect of the key turning in the keyhole (i.e., the lock being opened) is displayed, the dialogue image 030IWG20 changes from the normal color (white) to blue, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (8). This effect changes the presentation style of the dialogue effect as a result of the chance-up effect.

After that, when the first half of the Super Reach (outpost effect and chance up effect) ends and the second half of the Super Reach begins, a battle effect begins in which character A image 030IWC01 and enemy character A image 030IWC02 cross swords, as shown in Figure 8-13 (9).

When character A wins against enemy character A, the word "Victory" is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-13 (10), and then the combination of "666" decorative symbols, which is the jackpot symbol, is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-13 (11).

(Chance Up Production)
Next, the chance-up effect outlined in Fig. 8-12 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 8-14 to Fig. 8-18. Fig. 8-14 to Fig. 8-18 also show the part of the chance-up effect that is omitted in Fig. 8-12.

Figures 8-14 to 8-15 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of chance-up effects that target active displays. Note that in Figures 8-14 to 8-15, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

In the first half of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 8-14(1), an outpost display is executed in which the character A image 030IWC01 and the enemy character A image 030IWC02 face off against each other. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-14(1), a display is executed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5. Also, at this time, a display is executed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10.

Note that the performance images related to the outpost performance (e.g., character A image 030IWC01 and enemy character A image 030IWC02, etc.) are also displayed in Figure 8-14 (1) and onwards, but are omitted from the illustration for simplicity. In this example, the performance images related to the outpost performance have a lower display priority than performance images related to the chance up performance (e.g., key image, keyhole image, mini character image, etc.) and performance images related to the performance that is the target of the chance up performance (e.g., title display, active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern), and are displayed in a lower layer than those images. The details will be described later, but the performance images related to the outpost performance are covered by the performance images related to the chance up performance at the timing of Figure 8-15 (13) to (14).

Next, when the chance-up teasing performance (true) is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (2), a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13, which suggests that a keyhole will appear, is displayed in the center of the display area. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 stop moving around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini character A image 030IWC10. In addition, an "!" is displayed next to the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 to indicate the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (3), a display effect begins in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 gradually shrinks. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (4), the gradually shrinking keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaches the active display AH that is the target of the chance-up effect, and eventually, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (5), a display effect is displayed in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 overlaps the active display AH. At this time, triangular marks are displayed around the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 to indicate that it is shrinking.

Also, as shown in Figures 8-14 (2) to (5), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move to follow the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaching the active display AH. This configuration allows you to focus on the chance-up teasing effect and the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (6), the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13 becomes a silhouette on the active display AH, and a performance display is performed in which a glowing effect image is displayed around it. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 also become a silhouette, and a performance display is performed in which a glowing effect image is displayed around it.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (7), a keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 that resembles a keyhole is displayed on the active display AH. This type of effect display makes it clear that the chance-up teasing effect being executed is a chance-up teasing effect (true), and also makes it clear that the target of the chance-up effect is the active display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14(8), an effect is displayed in which character A, located at the front of the screen, throws a key into keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, located at the back of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-15(9), an effect is displayed in which key image 030IWG12 appears to move from the front of the screen toward keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 at the back. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-15(9), key image 030IWG12 is initially displayed at a size larger than keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, and then, as shown in FIG. 8-15(10), it is displayed as if it is moving toward keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 while shrinking (gradually becoming smaller to represent moving away). This configuration draws attention to the key image 030IWG12 acting on the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, enhancing the presentation effect of the chance-up presentation.

Then, to display the effect of the key being inserted into the keyhole, a key image 030IWG12 and a keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-15 (11), and to display the effect of the key turning in the keyhole (i.e., the lock being opened), a key image 030IWG12 rotated in the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-15 (12).

When the effect of the key turning in the keyhole (i.e., the lock being opened) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13), character A and the text "Pending Rank Up" are displayed along with an effect image that covers the image related to the outpost effect. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13), by displaying a close-up of character A along with an effect image that covers the image related to the outpost effect, the awkward feeling of a chance-up effect being executed in the middle of the outpost effect is reduced.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (14), character A and the text display "Pending Rank Up" are erased while the effect image covering the image related to the outpost effect is still displayed, the active display AH becomes a silhouette, and an effect display is performed in which a glowing effect image is displayed around it. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed again, and an effect display is performed in which a glowing effect image is displayed around it.

In this example, when a chance-up effect targeting an active display is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (14), the image display device 5 displays in the upper layers in the following order: decorative pattern > mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 > effect image covering the image related to the outpost effect > active display AH > image related to the outpost effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (15), the effect image covering the image related to the outpost performance is erased, and the active display AH is displayed in a color that has changed from the normal color (white) to blue. Also, because one of the stocks has been released and an item (key) has been consumed due to the chance-up performance targeting the active display, the number of mini key images 030IWG10 moving around the mini character A image 030IWC10 has decreased by one.

In this example, when a performance that is the target of the chance-up performance is being performed, a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed, and the chance-up performance is performed in a manner in which the key image 030IWG12 acts on the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11. Specifically, as shown in Figs. 8-14 to 8-15, a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, and the chance-up performance is performed in a manner in which the key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 and rotates. With this configuration, when a chance-up performance using the key image 030IWG12 is performed, the performance effect can be enhanced by providing a story-like element in which the key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 and rotates (i.e., the key is opened), and the interest can be increased.

In addition, in this example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed approximately in the center of the effect image related to the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect (see, for example, FIG. 8-14 (7)), and when the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed, a chance-up effect that targets other effects is not executed. For example, when the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, a chance-up effect that targets the dialogue display is not executed. This configuration makes it easier to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the chance-up effect, and also draws attention to the timing at which the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed.

In this example, as shown in Fig. 8-14 (1) to (8), the stored key image and character image (i.e., mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10) are displayed moving, and when the chance-up effect is executed, an effect is displayed in which the character throws a key into the keyhole. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the key image and to enhance the effect of the chance-up effect.

In this example, as shown in Fig. 8-14 (1) to (6), the mini key image 030IWG10 moves in a manner that revolves around the mini character A image 030IWC10, and stops moving when the chance-up effect is executed. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the key image and to enhance the effect of the chance-up effect.

In this example, the key is configured to look different when it is stocked and when it is used. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (8), when the key image is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area in the stock performance, the key image is displayed smaller in size than when it is displayed to move around the character in the outpost performance as shown in FIG. 8-12 (1). This configuration makes it possible to make the key image easier to see in the stock performance in which the key is the main focus, and to make the key less conspicuous when the outpost performance is the main focus. For example, the key image may be displayed larger when the key is stocked in the stock performance than when the character throws the key into the keyhole in the chance up performance (initial most enlarged state). This configuration allows the stock to have more impact when it is opened than when the key is stocked. Also, by making it more impactful, the player can be impressed that the performance is favorable, even if the performance that is the target of the chance up performance has a low expectation.

Next, we will explain a specific example of a chance-up effect that targets decorative symbols. Figures 8-16 to 8-18 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of a chance-up effect that targets decorative symbols. Note that in Figures 8-16 to 8-18, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

In the first half of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (1), an outpost performance is executed in which the character A image 030IWC01 and the enemy character A image 030IWC02 face off against each other. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (1), a performance display is executed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 moves as if circling the mini character A image 030IWC10.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (1), the movable body 32 is located in an initial position that covers a portion of the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5.

Note that the performance images related to the outpost performance (e.g., character A image 030IWC01 and enemy character A image 030IWC02, etc.) are also displayed in Figure 8-16 (1) and onwards, but are omitted from the illustration for simplicity. In this example, the performance images related to the outpost performance have a lower display priority than performance images related to the chance-up performance (e.g., key images, keyhole images, mini-character images, etc.) and performance images related to the performance that is the target of the chance-up performance (e.g., title display, active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern), and are displayed on a lower layer than those images.

Next, when the chance-up teasing performance (true) is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (2), a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13, which suggests that a keyhole will appear, is displayed in the center of the display area. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 stop moving around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini character A image 030IWC10. In addition, an "!" is displayed next to the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 to indicate the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13. In addition, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 displayed during the chance-up teasing effect is represented by a dotted line in this example as shown in Figure 8-16, but in reality it has a transparency that allows the performance images in lower layers (for example, performance images related to the outpost performance) to be visible, and is designed to not interfere with the content of the super reach (i.e. the outpost performance) as much as possible even while the chance-up teasing effect is being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(3), a display effect is started in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 gradually shrinks. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-16(4), the gradually shrinking keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaches the decorative pattern display area that is the target of the chance-up display, and eventually, as shown in FIG. 8-16(5), a display effect is performed in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 reaches the center position (corresponding to the center decorative pattern display area 5C) between the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R. At this time, a triangular mark indicating that the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is shrinking is displayed around the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13. Also, a display effect is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move to follow the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaching the active display AH.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(6), the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 becomes a silhouette, and a glowing effect image is displayed around it. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 also become a silhouette, and a glowing effect image is displayed around them. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-16(5) to FIG. 8-16(6), when changing the pose of the mini character A, a silhouette image is first displayed, and then the mini character A image in the changed pose is displayed from the silhouette image. In this way, by switching images between silhouette images rather than using material data that causes the mini character to move and change its pose, the material data can be simplified and the man-hours and costs involved in production can be reduced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (7), a keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed near the center position (the position corresponding to the middle decorative pattern display area 5C) between the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R. This type of effect display makes it clear that the chance up teasing effect being executed is a chance up teasing effect (true), and that the target of the chance up effect is a decorative pattern.

In this example, when executing a chance-up effect for a dialogue effect, the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed approximately at the center of the dialogue image 030IWG20 as shown in FIG. 8-12 (5), while when executing a chance-up effect for a decorative pattern, the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a position shifted toward the center of the display area from the center position (corresponding to the center decorative pattern display area 5C) between the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R as shown in FIG. 8-16 (7). This configuration makes it possible to prevent the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 from being covered by the movable body 32 and becoming difficult to see, and allows the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 to be displayed appropriately according to the characteristics of the target effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(8), an effect is displayed in which character A, located at the front of the screen, throws a key into the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, located at the back of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17(9), an effect is displayed in which the key image 030IWG12 appears to move from the front of the screen toward the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 at the back. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 8-17(9), the key image 030IWG12 is initially displayed at a size larger than the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, and then, as shown in FIG. 8-17(10), it is displayed as if it is moving toward the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 while shrinking (gradually becoming smaller to represent moving away).

Then, to display the effect of the key being inserted into the keyhole, a key image 30IWG12 and a keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-17 (11), and to display the effect of the key turning in the keyhole (i.e., the lock being opened), a key image 030IWG12 rotated in the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-17 (12).

When the effect of the key turning in the keyhole (i.e., the lock being opened) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13), character A and the text display "Pattern Rank Up" are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (14), while character A and the text display of "Pattern Rank Up" are still displayed, an effect is displayed in which the left decorative pattern begins to rotate in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and the right decorative pattern begins to rotate in the right decorative pattern display area 5R. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13) to (14), by displaying character A in close-up, the effect image related to the outpost effect is obscured, reducing the sense of incongruity caused by the chance-up effect being executed in the middle of the outpost effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (15), an image of Character A and Character B standing side by side is displayed near the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and a performance display is performed in which the rotating left and right decorative patterns move to a position superimposed on the image. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (16), a glowing effect image is displayed around the rotating left and right decorative patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (17), the glowing effect image around the left and right decorative patterns is erased, and the left and right decorative patterns change from the normal color (white) to gold and are displayed with the word "GOLD" written on them, and the left and right decorative patterns stop rotating.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (18), the gold right and left decorative patterns are displayed in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, respectively, and the remaining prelude effects are executed. Since all stocked keys have been used due to the chance-up effect targeting the decorative patterns being executed, the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and mini key image 030IWG10 are no longer displayed, but no special effects are executed to indicate that they will not be displayed. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the mini key image 030IWG10, which is no longer in use, from standing out.

In this example, regardless of where the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed (i.e., regardless of which effect is the target of the chance-up effect), at least a part of the chance-up teasing effect is executed in a common manner. Specifically, as shown in Figures 8-14 (2) to (5) and 8-16 (2) to (5), even if the effects that are the target of the chance-up effect are different, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is initially displayed in a close-up across the entire screen, and is then displayed in a common manner that is gradually reduced. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to whether the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed, i.e., whether the chance-up effect is executed, as well as which effect is the target of the chance-up effect.

In addition, in this example, regardless of the position where the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed in the chance-up effect (i.e., regardless of the type of effect being targeted), an image is displayed in a common display position to notify that the performance mode of the target effect will change. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), a character and the text display "Pending rank up" or "Pattern rank up" are displayed to notify that the performance mode will change. This configuration makes it easier to recognize that the performance mode of the target effect will change due to the chance-up effect.

In addition, in this example, the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is not displayed at the timing when the presentation mode of the target presentation changes in the chance-up presentation. Specifically, as shown in Figures 8-15 (13) to (15) and Figures 8-17 (13) to 8-18 (17), the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is not displayed at the timing when the active display or decorative pattern mode changes. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the change in presentation mode of the target presentation due to the chance-up presentation.

In this example, the effect images relating to at least some of the effects among the multiple types of effects that are the target of the chance-up effect have a higher display priority than the key image, even when the key image acts on the keyhole image. Specifically, the decorative pattern has a higher display priority than the key image, even when the key image acts on the keyhole image. With this configuration, it is possible to ensure visibility for some effects in any situation. Furthermore, for effect images relating to other effects (for example, images that are not information related to the progress of the game, such as dialogue displays or title displays), the display priority is set to be lower than that of the key image when the key image acts on the keyhole image, thereby realizing a realistic effect and enhancing the effect of the effect.

In this example, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) and Fig. 8-17 (13), when executing the chance-up effect, it is possible to display notification images such as effect images and characters covering the effect image related to the outpost effect, and text displays such as "reserved rank up" and "pattern rank up". Then, it is possible to execute the chance-up effect by using a presentation pattern that changes the presentation mode of the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect when the notification images are displayed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-17 (13) to Fig. 8-18 (17), a pattern in which the presentation mode of the decorative pattern changes while the character or text display of "pattern rank up" remains), and a presentation pattern that changes the presentation mode of the target effect at a time other than when the notification image is displayed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) to (15), a pattern in which the presentation mode of the active display changes after the effect image, character, or text display of "reserved rank up" is erased). With this configuration, it is possible to make the player aware that the presentation mode of the target effect will change by displaying the notification image, and it is possible to execute the chance-up effect suitably by using a presentation pattern according to the target effect. In particular, with the former, the effect can be made more spectacular by seamlessly increasing the chance (i.e., changing the presentation mode of the target effect) while the notification image is displayed, and with the latter, the chance is increased (i.e., changing the presentation mode of the target effect) after the notification image is erased, preventing an increase in the amount of data related to effect control.

In addition, in this example, a presentation pattern that changes the presentation mode of the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect when the notification image is displayed has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a presentation pattern that changes the presentation mode of the target effect at a time other than when the notification image is displayed. Specifically, a chance-up effect in which the mode of the decorative pattern changes has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a chance-up effect in which the mode of the active display changes (see Figure 8-7). With this configuration, the expectation can be varied depending on the flashiness of the presentation pattern, increasing interest.

In this example, the notification image can identify which effect's presentation mode has changed, and an image different from the presentation image related to that effect is used. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), the text display "Pending Rank Up" or "Pattern Rank Up" is displayed. Such a configuration makes it easy to recognize which effect's presentation mode has changed.

In this example, the notification image displayed during the execution of the chance-up effect is displayed in a manner that covers the effect image related to the super reach (outpost effect), but the effects that are the subject of the chance-up effect include those in which the effect image is covered by the notification image and those in which it is not covered, and the latter have a higher probability of winning than the former. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) and Fig. 8-17 (13), the notification image includes an effect image that covers the effect image related to the outpost effect, as well as a character and the text display of "reserved rank up" or "pattern rank up". This notification image covers the active display AH, but does not cover the decorative pattern. And the chance-up effect in which the state of the decorative pattern changes has a higher probability of winning than the chance-up effect in which the state of the active display changes (see Fig. 8-7). With this configuration, the expectation level can be varied depending on the flashiness of the chance-up effect, and interest can be increased.

In this example, the effects that are the target of the chance-up effect include those in which the effect image is covered by the notification image and those in which it is not covered, with the latter being more likely to be executed at a later timing within one variable display period than the former. Specifically, chance-up effects in which the state of the decorative pattern changes are executed later than chance-up effects in which the state of the active display changes (see Figure 8-3). With this configuration, it is possible to execute chance-up effects according to the time when the player's expectations are highest.

In this example, the effects that are the target of the chance-up effect include those in which the effect image is covered by the notification image and those in which it is not covered. In the latter case, one notification image is switched to another and displayed. Specifically, when a chance-up effect that targets a decorative pattern is executed, an image of character A is displayed as shown in Figures 8-17 (13) to (14), and then an image of character A and character B standing side by side is displayed as shown in Figures 8-17 (15) to 8-18 (17). This configuration can enhance the effect of the chance-up effect, which has a high expectation.

Next, a specific example of the chance-up teasing effect (fake) will be described. Figure 8-19 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the chance-up teasing effect (fake). In Figure 8-19, the transition of the effect screen is in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

Figure 8-19 (1) shows the state immediately after the prelude performance in the first half of the Super Reach has started and the chance-up performance targeting the active display has been executed. In this example, as shown in Figure 8-19 (1), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are redisplayed in their initial positions at the bottom right of the display area of the image display device 5 after the chance-up performance has been executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-19(2), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5 so as to pass through the display position of the effect (for example, title display, active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern) that is the target of the chance-up effect. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 8-19(1) and (2), before the dialogue effect starts, the effect display is performed such that the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move so as to pass through the display position (or the position where it is scheduled to be displayed) of the dialogue image 030IWG20. With this configuration, when the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed in a moving manner, the player's expectations for the chance-up effect targeting the effect at the displayed position can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

In this example, the effects that are the target of the chance-up effect are displayed in various positions such as the top, bottom, and bottom right of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 move to pass through these positions. This configuration allows players to focus on the positions to which the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 move and whether the effect displayed at those positions is the target of the chance-up effect.

In this example, when executing one chance up effect targeting one effect and then executing another chance up effect targeting another effect, the first chance up effect is executed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed before the other chance up effect is executed (see FIG. 8-4). This configuration allows for an interval between the first chance up effect and the other chance up effect, making each stand out, and also ensures a period of time during which the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed in a moving manner, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (1) to (2).

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (2), when the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are moving along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 have a lower display priority than the effect images (e.g., active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern, etc.) related to the effects that may be the target of the chance-up effect, and are displayed on a lower layer than them. This configuration allows attention to be drawn to the effects that may be the target of the chance-up effect. Note that, without being limited to this configuration, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 may be displayed on a lower layer than the effect images (e.g., decorative pattern) related to some of the effects that may be the target of the chance-up effect, and displayed on a higher layer than the effect images (e.g., active display and dialogue display) related to the other effects when moving along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed during the execution of a super reach, and are displayed with a higher display priority than the performance images related to the super reach (for example, the character images related to the outpost performance), but when the chance-up performance is not being performed, they are displayed so as not to obstruct the visibility of at least the central part of the performance image related to the super reach. Specifically, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed so as to move around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, rather than moving in the center of the display area, and are not displayed superimposed on the face part, etc., of the character image related to the outpost performance. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 from obstructing the super reach (outpost performance) while still displaying them.

Next, when the chance-up teasing performance (fake) is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (3), a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13, which suggests that a keyhole will appear, is displayed in the center of the display area. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 stop moving around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini character A image 030IWC10. In addition, an "!" is displayed next to the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 to indicate the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (3), when the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13 is displayed, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 move closer to the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13.

In this example, as shown in Figures 8-19 (2) and (3), the mini character A image 030IWC10 and the mini key image 030IWG10 move at a slow speed when the effect to be used has not been specified (or when the chance up teasing effect is not being executed), and at a high speed when it has been specified (or when the chance up teasing effect is being executed). This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the chance up teasing effect or the effect that is the target of the chance up effect.

Next, an effect display begins in which the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13 gradually shrinks, but as shown in FIG. 8-19 (4), the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11) is not displayed and the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13 is erased. At this time, a "?" is displayed next to the mini-key image 030IWG10 and mini-character A image 030IWC10 to indicate that the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13 has been erased. With this configuration, it becomes clear that the executed chance-up teasing effect is a chance-up teasing effect (fake).

When the chance-up teasing effect (fake) ends, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (5), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed again in their initial positions at the bottom right of the display area of the image display device 5. In this example, they are displayed in the same initial position after the chance-up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (1) and after the chance-up teasing effect (fake) is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (5). This configuration makes it easy to understand that the chance-up teasing effect (fake) has ended, and conveys the meaning of starting afresh. Also, by displaying them again in their initial positions, it is possible to prevent the amount of data related to effect control from increasing.

In this example, the keyhole (suggestive) image 030IWG13 and the keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 can only be displayed once in response to the same effect. For example, if a chance-up teasing effect (or chance-up teasing effect (false)), which teases whether or not a chance-up effect targeting the dialogue display will be executed, has been executed once, the chance-up teasing effect targeting the dialogue display will not be executed again even if the dialogue display is displayed thereafter. This configuration makes it easy to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the chance-up effect.

The mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 may be configured so that a portion of them extends outside the display area (i.e., a portion of them is not displayed) when they are moved along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5. With this configuration, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 can be flexibly moved and displayed in accordance with the performance images related to other performances.

For example, when the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are moving along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, effects that are not subject to the chance-up effect may not be executed. With this configuration, attention can be drawn to the effects that are executed when the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are moving along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, in this example, since the chance up effect can be executed multiple times, it may be possible to make it possible to recognize the number of times it has been executed. For example, when the first chance up effect is executed, an effect image resembling a blue flame may be displayed at the end of the display area of the image display device 5, when the second chance up effect is executed, the effect image may change to green, and when the third chance up effect is executed, the effect image may change to red. With this configuration, it is possible to recognize that a chance up has occurred even after the chance up effect has ended and the effect image has been erased.

Next, we will explain the keyhole (suggested) image and keyhole (real) image for each effect that is the target of the chance-up effect. Figure 8-20 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of keyhole (real) images for each effect that is the target of the chance-up effect.

As shown in FIG. 8-20, in this example, there are multiple types of effects that are the target of the chance-up effect, and the display size of the effect image for each effect is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-20 (1) and (3), the dialogue display has a smaller display size than the title display. In this example, the chance-up effect is executed in a manner in which a keyhole (real) image is displayed in the position where the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect is displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-20, the display size of the keyhole (real) image is configured to differ depending on the target effect.

For example, the keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the dialogue image 030IWG20 shown in FIG. 8-20(3) has a smaller display size than the keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the title image 030IWG21 shown in FIG. 8-20(1). This configuration allows the player to predict the effect that will be the target of the chance-up effect from the position where the keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 is displayed, thereby increasing interest, and by displaying the keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 at a display size appropriate for the effect that will be targeted, a natural effect can be achieved.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the keyhole image is materialized, the silhouette of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed at a common size regardless of the type of effect that is the target of the chance-up effect. Then, the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a display size that corresponds to the type of effect that is the target of the chance-up effect. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to standardize the animation until the keyhole is materialized, and to prevent the amount of data related to effect control from increasing.

As explained above, this feature section 030IW discloses the gaming machine configurations shown in means 1 to means 29 below.

(Means 1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and includes a suggestion performance execution means that suggests that the machine is controlled to the favorable state and is capable of executing multiple types of suggestion performances that differ in expectation level depending on the performance mode (e.g., a performance that displays a title display in a predetermined mode, a performance that displays an active display in a predetermined mode, a dialogue performance that displays a dialogue display in a predetermined mode, a decorative pattern performance that displays a decorative pattern in a predetermined mode, etc.), and a special image display performance execution means that can display a special image (e.g., a mini key image 030IWG10 or a key image 030IWG12), and by using the displayed special image, a suggestion performance that is being executed in one performance mode can be changed to a different performance mode. and a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect (for example, a chance-up effect in which the display color of the active display is changed from a normal color (white) to blue) that changes the display mode to one with a higher expectation than the normal color (white). The special effect execution means displays a special corresponding image (for example, a keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11) when the suggestion effect is being executed, and executes a special effect in a manner in which the special image acts on the special corresponding image (for example, displays a keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH or a decorative pattern, and executes a chance-up effect in a manner in which the key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11 and rotates. See Figs. 8-15(9) to (15), Figs. 8-17(9) to 8-18(17), etc.). With such a configuration, when a special effect using a special image is executed, it is possible to enhance the effect of the performance by providing a story related to the special image, and to increase interest.

(Means 2) The special response image is displayed in the approximate center of the performance image related to the suggested performance being executed (for example, see FIG. 8-12 (5) and FIG. 8-14 (7)). At the timing when the special response image is displayed, a special performance targeting a suggested performance other than the suggested performance corresponding to the special response image is not executed (for example, at the timing when the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, a chance-up performance targeting the dialogue display is not executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily understand the suggested performance that is the target of the special performance, and to draw attention to the timing at which the special response image is displayed.

(Means 3) The special response image can be displayed only once in response to the same suggestive effect (for example, if a chance-up teasing effect (or chance-up teasing effect (false)) that teases whether or not a chance-up effect targeting the dialogue display will be executed has been executed once, the chance-up teasing effect targeting the dialogue display will not be executed again even if the dialogue display is displayed thereafter). Such a configuration makes it easy to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect.

(Means 4) When the presentation mode of the suggestive effect changes due to a special effect, the presentation mode after the change differs depending on the timing of the change (for example, the later the chance-up effect is executed, the more likely it is to change to a more advantageous presentation mode. See Figures 8-3 and 8-8). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the timing at which the special effect will be executed, and to prevent players who had high hopes for the timing of the change from being disappointed.

(Means 5) A display teasing effect execution means is provided that can execute a display teasing effect (e.g., a chance-up teasing effect) that teases whether or not a special corresponding image is to be displayed, and the display teasing effect execution means can execute the display teasing effect in a common manner regardless of where the special corresponding image is displayed (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-14 (2) to (5) and Fig. 8-16 (2) to (5), even if the target effects are different, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is initially displayed in a close-up across the entire screen and then displayed in a common manner that is reduced). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not a special corresponding image is to be displayed, i.e., whether or not a special effect will be executed, and to draw attention to which suggestion effect is the target of the chance-up effect.

(Means 6) When a special image is used in a special effect, it is displayed at a larger display size than the special corresponding image, and then displayed so as to act on the special corresponding image while shrinking (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-15 (9) to (12) and Fig. 8-17 (9) to (12), the key image 030IWG12 is displayed moving from the front side of the screen toward the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 at the back, so it is initially displayed at a larger display size than the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, and then displayed so as to rotate while shrinking (gradually becoming smaller to represent moving away).) With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image acting on the special corresponding image, and the effect of the special effect can be enhanced.

(Means 7) The special effect execution means can execute a special effect multiple times, and can vary the execution time depending on the special effect being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), a chance-up effect that targets a decorative pattern has a longer execution time than a dialogue display or a chance-up effect that targets a dialogue display. With such a configuration, various special effects can be executed at an appropriate execution time, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

(Means 8) When the presentation mode is changed by a special effect, the suggestive effect takes a longer time to execute than when the presentation mode is not changed by the special effect (for example, as shown in Figures 8-4 (A) and (B), the presentation execution time T11 of a dialogue effect whose presentation mode is changed by a chance-up effect is longer than the presentation execution time T12 of a dialogue effect whose presentation mode is not changed by a chance-up effect). With such a configuration, when a special effect is executed, a period for executing the special effect and its corresponding suggestive effect can be secured.

(Means 9) The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing a first suggestive performance (e.g., a performance that displays a title display) and a second suggestive performance (e.g., a performance that displays a dialogue display) that is smaller in display size than the first suggestive performance, and the special performance execution means is capable of executing a special performance in a manner in which a special corresponding image is displayed at a position where a performance image related to the suggestive performance is displayed when the suggestive performance is being executed (e.g., a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a position where the title image 030IWG21 is displayed or where the dialogue image 030IWG20 is displayed), and When the target suggestive effect is the first suggestive effect, the special corresponding image is displayed in a first display size corresponding to the display size of the first suggestive effect, and when the target suggestive effect is the second suggestive effect, the special corresponding image is displayed in a second display size corresponding to the display size of the second suggestive effect, the second display size being smaller than the first display size (for example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the dialogue image 030IWG20 shown in FIG. 8-20(3) has a smaller display size than the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the title image 030IWG21 shown in FIG. 8-20(1)). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest by allowing the player to predict the target suggestive effect from the position where the special corresponding image is displayed, and it is possible to create a natural effect by displaying the special corresponding image in a display size suitable for the target effect.

(Means 10) The suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing a specific suggestion performance (e.g., a performance that displays a dialogue display) in which a performance image is displayed at a first position, and a special suggestion performance (e.g., a performance that displays a decorative pattern) in which a performance image is displayed at a second position (e.g., a position closer to the top end of the display area of the image display device 5) that is closer to the edge of the display area of the display means than the first position, and when the specific suggestion performance is executed, the special performance execution means displays a special corresponding image at approximately the center position of the performance image displayed at the first position (e.g., the As shown in FIG. 8-16(7), the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed at approximately the center of the dialogue image 030IWG20, and when a special suggestion effect is executed, the special response image is displayed at a position shifted toward the center of the display area of the display means from the center position of the effect image displayed in the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-16(7), the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a position shifted toward the center of the display area from the center position (the position corresponding to the middle decorative pattern display area 5C) between the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R). With such a configuration, the special response image can be displayed appropriately according to the characteristics of the target suggestion effect.

(Means 11) The special effects include notification effects that notify the player that the presentation mode of the target suggestive effect will change by displaying a special image in a common display position regardless of the position where the special corresponding image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), a character and the text display of "Pending rank up" or "Pattern rank up" are displayed). Such a configuration makes it easier to recognize that the presentation mode of the target suggestive effect will change due to the special effect.

(Means 12) The special response image is not displayed when the presentation mode of the target suggestive effect in the special effect changes (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) to (15) and Fig. 8-17 (13) to Fig. 8-18 (17), the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is not displayed when the active display or decorative pattern mode changes). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the change in presentation mode of the suggestive effect.

(Means 13) The special image display means displays the special image in a manner that moves so as to pass through the display position of the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect during the period before the special effect is executed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-12 (1) to (4) and Fig. 8-19 (1) to (2), the mini character A image 030IWC10 and the mini key image 030IWG10 move so as to pass through the position where the dialogue image related to the dialogue effect is displayed (or the position where it is scheduled to be displayed) during the period before the chance-up effect that targets the dialogue effect is executed). With such a configuration, when the special image is displayed in a moving manner, the player's expectations for the execution of a special effect targeting the suggestive effect at the position where the special image is displayed can be increased, and interest can be improved.

(Means 14) When a special image is used, the special image display means moves and displays the special image to the display position of the target suggestive effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (5) and FIG. 8-16 (5), the mini character A image 030IWC10 and the mini key image 030IWG10 move to the display position of the active display AH that is the target of the chance-up effect or to the decorative pattern display area). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special effect and the target suggestive effect.

(Means 15) The special image has a lower display priority than the effect image related to the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (14) and FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini character A image 030IWC10 and the mini key image 030IWG10 have a lower display priority than the title display, active display, dialogue display, and decorative pattern, and are displayed in a lower layer than those). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the suggestive effect.

(Means 16) The special effect execution means can execute one special effect targeted at one suggestion effect, and then execute another special effect targeted at another suggestion effect, and the other special effect is executed after the first special effect has been executed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, a chance-up effect with a different target is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed). With such a configuration, it is possible to set an interval between the one special effect and the other special effect to make them stand out, and also to ensure a period of time during which the special image is displayed in a moving manner.

(Means 17) The speed at which the special image moves is faster when the suggestive effect to be used is specified than when it is not specified (for example, as shown in Figures 8-19 (2) and (3), the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 move at a slow speed when the effect to be used is not specified, and at a high speed when it is specified). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the suggestive effect to be used.

(Means 18) When the special image is displayed and moved, an additional image is added, and the additional image is also displayed and moved, and when a special effect is executed, the additional image operates (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-14 (1) to (8), Fig. 8-16 (1) to (8), Fig. 8-19 (2), the mini character A image 030IWC10 is displayed and moved together with the mini key image 030IWG10, and when a chance-up effect is executed, the character A image 030IWC10 throws the key image 030IWG12 into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image and to enhance the effect of the special effect.

(Means 19) The special image is displayed in a manner that moves around the additional image, and the movement stops when the special effect is executed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-14 (1) to (6), Fig. 8-16 (1) to (6), and Fig. 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 moves in a manner that moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10, and stops its movement when the chance-up effect is executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image and to enhance the effect of the special effect.

(Means 20) The special image and additional image are displayed during the execution of a specific performance (e.g., a super reach) that suggests that the player will be controlled to an advantageous state, and are displayed with a higher display priority than the performance images related to the specific performance (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-12 (1) to (4), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed with a higher display priority than the character images related to the outpost performance of the first half of the super reach), and are displayed so as not to interfere with the visibility of at least the central part of the performance image related to the specific performance when the specific performance is being executed but the special performance is not being executed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-12 (1) to (4) and Fig. 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed so as to move around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, rather than moving around the center of the display area, and are not displayed superimposed on the face part, etc., of the character image related to the outpost performance). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special image and additional image from interfering with the specific performance while still displaying them.

(Means 21) A special suggestion effect execution means is provided that can execute a first special suggestion effect (for example, a chance up teasing effect (true)) that suggests that a special effect will be executed and that the special effect will be executed after the effect, and a second special suggestion effect (for example, a chance up teasing effect (false)) that suggests that a special effect will be executed and that the special effect will not be executed after the effect, and the special image is displayed again at the initial position after the second special suggestion effect is executed (for example, the special image is displayed at a common initial position after the chance up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (1) and after the chance up teasing effect (false) is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (5)). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily understand that the second special suggestion effect has ended, and it is possible to express the meaning of starting afresh. In addition, by displaying it again at the initial position, it is possible to prevent the amount of data related to the effect control from increasing.

(Means 22) The special effect execution means can execute a special effect multiple times, and while executing one special effect targeting one suggestion effect, it does not execute other special effects targeting other suggestion effects (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, a chance-up effect with a different target is executed after a predetermined period has elapsed). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special effect being executed.

(Means 23) The effect images (e.g., decorative patterns) related to at least some of the suggestive effects among the multiple types of suggestive effects have a higher display priority than the special images, even when the special images act on the special corresponding images (see, for example, FIG. 8-15 (9)). With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure visibility of some suggestive effects in any situation. In addition, for effect images related to other suggestive effects (e.g., images that are not information related to the progress of the game, such as dialogue or title displays), a lower display priority than the special images when the special images act on the special corresponding images can be used to realize realistic effects and enhance the presentation effect.

(Means 24) The special effect execution means can display a specific image when executing a special effect (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) and Fig. 8-17 (13), a character and the text display of "Pending Rank Up" or "Pattern Rank Up" are displayed together with an effect image covering the performance image related to the outpost performance), and can execute a special effect by a first performance pattern that changes the performance mode of the target suggestive effect when the specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-17 (13) to Fig. 8-18 (17), a pattern in which the appearance of the decorative pattern changes while the character and "Pattern Rank Up" display remain), and a second performance pattern that changes the performance mode of the target suggestive effect at a time other than when the specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) to (15), a pattern in which the appearance of the active display changes after the character and "Pending Rank Up" display are erased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player aware that the performance mode of the suggestive effect changes by displaying a specific image, and it is possible to execute a special effect suitably by a performance pattern according to the target suggestive effect.

(Means 25) When a special effect is executed by the first effect pattern, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when a special effect is executed by the second effect pattern (for example, a chance-up effect in which the appearance of the decorative pattern changes has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a chance-up effect in which the appearance of the active display changes. See FIG. 8-7). With such a configuration, the expectation can be varied depending on the flashiness of the effect pattern, thereby increasing interest.

(Means 26) As the specific image, it is possible to identify which suggestive performance has changed in its presentation mode, and an image different from the presentation image related to the suggestive performance is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), the text display "Pending Rank Up" or "Pattern Rank Up" is displayed). With such a configuration, it is easy to recognize which suggestive performance has changed in its presentation mode.

(Means 27) The special effect is executed during the execution of a specific effect (e.g., a super reach) that suggests whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and the specific image displayed during the execution of the special effect is displayed in a manner that covers the effect image related to the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), a character and the text display of "Hold rank up" or "Pattern rank up" are displayed together with an effect image that covers the effect image related to the outpost effect), and the suggestive effect includes a suggestive effect that is covered by a specific image and a suggestive effect that is not covered by a specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13), the active display AH is covered, while as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13), the decorative pattern is not covered), and the suggestive effect that is not covered by a specific image has a higher expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state than the suggestive effect that is covered by a specific image (for example, a chance up effect in which the state of the decorative pattern changes has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a chance up effect in which the state of the active display changes. See FIG. 8-7). This configuration allows the level of expectation to vary depending on the extravagance of the special performance, increasing interest.

(Means 28) The special effects of the first presentation pattern are more likely to be executed later in one variable display period than the special effects of the second presentation pattern (for example, a chance-up effect in which the appearance of the decorative pattern changes is executed later than a chance-up effect in which the appearance of the active display changes. See FIG. 8-3). With such a configuration, it is possible to execute special effects according to the period when the player's expectations are high.

(Means 29) When a special effect is being executed by the first effect pattern, one specific image is switched to another specific image for display (for example, after an image of character A is displayed as shown in Fig. 8-17 (13) to (14), an image of character A and character B standing side by side is displayed as shown in Fig. 8-17 (15) to Fig. 8-18 (17)). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of a highly anticipated special effect.

In addition to executing various preview effects such as suggestive effects and special effects, it is preferable to execute special effects and development effects that suggest that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state. The actual machine control will be explained in detail below regarding the execution mode and control method of special effects and development effects.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
9 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described below). The variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 11). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 9, three locations at the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are general winning openings 10 that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 11), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 9). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 9), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned by a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 11).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 11).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 10 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed into a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In the special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a stopped symbol, it is a "miss". Note that "misses" in this pachinko game machine 1 include "misses with time reduction" that are controlled to a high base state (time reduction state) from the next variable display without going through a jackpot game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize hole) during the big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state.
(Progression of the performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 turning on and off, the movement of the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 11. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power supply switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 12 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S901). Then, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). The initial settings include setting a stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and settings to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S903). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S903; Yes), recovery processing (step S904) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S905). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S903; No), an initialization process (step S906) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S907) is executed. The initialization process in step S906 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S905, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S903, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S905, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball striking handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S907, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

If the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S907, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 and the setting change process of step S907 are executed, making it possible to control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S904 and the setting confirmation process of step S905 are executed, making it possible to control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 is executed but the setting change state is not controlled, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S904 is executed but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S908). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is generated periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S909), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9010). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 13. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 13 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it diagnoses abnormalities in the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 14 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 13. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 12.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 10 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 15 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 15 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 15 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

As shown in FIG. 15(A), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the first special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 15(A).

As shown in FIG. 15(B), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the second special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 15(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 16, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the previous setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the second special display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a probability bonus state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for time-saving misses regardless of the setting value when the game state is normal and when the time-saving state, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for time-saving misses regardless of the setting value when the game state is normal and when the time-saving state. In other words, when the game state is normal and when the time-saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is a time-saving miss is the same rate for all setting values, so it is possible to prevent the setting value from excessively increasing gambling nature. Furthermore, for the time-saving misses to which a common judgment value number is assigned for each setting value, it is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 regarding the judgment of the variable display result being a time-saving miss.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 17 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 17 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 18, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S90175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S90174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S90175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, it also includes one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Part 029SG in the Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, a characteristic feature 029SG according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described. The characteristic feature 029SG includes an invention 029SG and an invention 033SG.

The gaming machine of the first aspect of the invention 029SG is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
a suggestion performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 18 ) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances including a special suggestion performance (for example, reach performance I) and a first suggestion performance (for example, reach performance A), a second suggestion performance (for example, reach performance B), a third suggestion performance (for example, reach performance F), and a fourth suggestion performance (for example, reach performance E) which have a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion performance;
a development performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance process during variable display shown in FIG. 18 ) capable of executing a special development performance as a first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestive performance is announced (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-8 , in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach η, a portion where a high expectation reach performance development announcement performance is executed from the execution of a reach performance A), and capable of executing a special development performance different from the special development performance as a second development pattern after it is announced that the second suggestive performance will not be controlled to the advantageous state as a performance result (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-8 , in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ζ, a portion where a reach performance E development announcement performance is executed after a variable display result (miss) is once announced as a performance result of a reach performance B);
Equipped with
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the third suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the execution of reach effect A, and a reach effect F is further executed).
When the second development pattern is executed by the development performance execution means, the fourth suggestion performance can be executed after the special development performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-8, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach ζ, the variable display result (miss) is once notified as the performance result of the reach performance B, and then the reach performance E development notification performance is executed, and the reach performance E is further executed).
The performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-8 and FIG. 19-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance).
The special development effects include a first effect (e.g., a blackout effect shown in FIG. 19-10 and FIG. 19-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, a second effect (e.g., an early effect shown in FIG. 19-10 and FIG. 19-55) which is an effect executed after the first effect and in which early information is visibly displayed, and a tertiary effect (e.g., a late effect shown in FIG. 19-10 and FIG. 19-55) which is an effect executed after the second effect and in which late information with a higher degree of emphasis than the early information is visibly displayed,
The period from when the special development effect is executed to when it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state is shorter than the period from when the special development effect is executed to when it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figures 19-8 and 19-9, the length L13 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance F are set longer than the length L11 of the period from the start timing of the reach performance E development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance E (the notification timing of the variable display result)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of a special development effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game caused by an excessively long period until it is announced that control will be entered into an advantageous state, and when the special suggestion effect is executed after the execution of a special development effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the special suggestion effect in an appropriate manner before it is announced that control will be entered into an advantageous state, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The duration of the second suggestion effect is longer than the duration of the first suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-7, the length L2 of the execution period of the reach effect B is set longer than the length L1 of the execution period of the reach effect A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the second suggestion effect can attract the player's attention for a longer period of time than the first suggestion effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Also, unlike the first suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect does not execute a development effect before the effect result is notified, so that even if a special development effect is not executed, the player can be sure to pay attention to whether or not the effect result of the second suggestion effect indicates that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the third aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect,
a development suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a development suggestion effect (e.g., a meter effect, a reach effect E development suggestion effect, a reach effect G development suggestion effect) that suggests at least the execution of the special development effect (e.g., a part that executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 18 after the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of a meter effect in the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. 19-23, determines the execution of a reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 19-26, or determines the execution of a reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 19-29);
The development suggestion performance execution means includes:
As the development suggestion effect, a special development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the special development effect can be executed either during the execution period of the first suggestion effect or during the execution period of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in Figures 19-7 and 19-8, in a variable display of the fluctuation patterns of Super Reach α, Super Reach β, Super Reach δ, Super Reach ζ, and Super Reach η, a portion in which a meter effect can be executed during the execution of Reach effect A and the execution of Reach effect B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, during the execution period of the first suggestion effect and during the execution period of the second suggestion effect, the special development suggestion effect can arouse the player's anticipation for the special development effect to be executed.

The gaming machine of the fourth aspect of the invention 029SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing the special development effect as a third development pattern before the special suggestion effect is executed when the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are not executed and the special suggestion effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-9 and FIG. 19-25, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage at a second timing without going through the execution of the reach effect A or the reach effect B, and a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is not executed, the special development effect is executed, and the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not a highly anticipated special suggestion effect will be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect,
The period from when the special development effect is executed to when the special suggestion effect is executed and it is notified that the advantageous state will be controlled is longer than the period from when the special development effect is executed to when the third suggestion effect is executed and it is notified that the advantageous state will be controlled (for example, as shown in Figures 19-8 and 19-9, the length L13 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of reach effect I (the notification timing of the variable display result) is set longer than the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of reach effect F).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by lengthening the period until notification when a highly anticipated special development effect is executed, it is possible to effectively increase the sense of expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the sixth aspect of the invention 029SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects,
a development suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a development suggestion effect (e.g., a meter effect, a reach effect E development suggestion effect, a reach effect G development suggestion effect) that suggests at least the execution of the special development effect (e.g., a part that executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 18 after the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of a meter effect in the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. 19-23, determines the execution of a reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 19-26, or determines the execution of a reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 19-29);
The development suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing a special development suggestion performance (e.g., a meter performance) in which a performance mode changes stepwise to suggest the execution of the special development performance, and a special development suggestion performance (e.g., a reach performance development suggestion performance) in which a performance mode changes stepwise to suggest the execution of the special development performance,
The rate at which the presentation mode changes to a specific number in the special development suggestion performance is higher than the rate at which the presentation mode changes to the specific number in the special development suggestion performance (for example, as shown in Figures 19-24 and 19-54, the meter performance changes the display mode of the meter 029SG005M in five stages (six stages if the state in which the meter performance is not executed is included), whereas the reach performance E development suggestion performance changes the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image in two stages).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the first suggestion effect in which a special development suggestion effect is executed and the second suggestion effect in which a special development suggestion effect is executed, and since the special development suggestion effect is more likely to change to a specific stage number than the special development suggestion effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it will change to a specific stage number, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A seventh aspect of the gaming machine of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the sixth aspect,
The period during which the special development suggestion effect is executed is longer than the period during which the special development suggestion effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-7 to FIG. 19-9, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach δ or the super reach ζ, the length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the reach effect E development suggestion effect executable period).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to suggest that the third suggestion performance, which has a higher expectation than the first suggestion performance, will be executed after the special development performance is executed for a longer period of time than the fourth suggestion performance will be executed after the execution of the special development performance is suggested, thereby increasing the interest in the special development suggestion performance.

The gaming machine of the eighth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the sixth or seventh aspect,
When the second suggestion effect is executed, the development suggestion effect execution means does not execute the special development suggestion effect until the effect result of the second suggestion effect is notified (for example, the reach effect E development suggestion effect is a part that can be executed after the variable display result (miss) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the game from occurring due to the player perceiving that a special development suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the second suggestion effect, thereby informing the player that the result of the second suggestion effect is that the player will not be controlled to an advantageous state.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect of the invention 029SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighth aspects,
a favorable result suggestion effect (e.g., a chance-up effect) which suggests that the result of the suggestion effect will be favorable to the player while the suggestion effect is being executed, the favorable result suggestion effect being executed according to the number of executions of constituent effects which constitute the favorable result suggestion effect (e.g., a part which executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 18 after the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the chance-up effect in the chance-up effect decision process shown in FIG. 19-31);
The number of times that the constituent effects are executed when the third suggestion effect is being executed is greater than the number of times that the constituent effects are executed when the first suggestion effect is being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-34, during the execution of reach effect F, a total of three effects can be executed as the effects that constitute the chance-up effect, namely, the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as an operation prompting image (the chance-up effect can be executed in pattern S, pattern T, or pattern U), whereas during the execution of reach effect A, a total of two effects can be executed as the effects that constitute the chance-up effect, namely, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 (the chance-up effect can be executed in pattern P or pattern Q)).
The number of times that the constituent effects are executed when the fourth suggestion effect is being executed is equal to or less than the number of times that the constituent effects are executed when the second suggestion effect is being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-34, during the execution of reach effect E, a total of two effects can be executed as the effects that constitute the chance-up effect, namely, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 (the chance-up effect can be executed in pattern S and pattern Q), whereas during the execution of reach effect B, a total of three effects can be executed as the effects that constitute the chance-up effect, namely, the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image 029SG200 (the chance-up effect can be executed in pattern P, pattern Q, and pattern R)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the case where a special development effect is executed and then a third suggestion effect is executed before the result of the first suggestion effect is announced, the number of times the constituent effects are executed is greater when the third suggestion effect is executed than when the first suggestion effect is executed, thereby making it possible to preferably draw the player's attention to the result of the third suggestion effect; and in the case where a special development effect is executed and then a fourth suggestion effect is executed after it is announced that the second suggestion effect will not be controlled to an advantageous state as a result, the number of times the constituent effects are executed when the fourth suggestion effect is executed is less than the number of times the constituent effects are executed when the second suggestion effect is executed, thereby preventing the player from paying excessive attention to the result of the fourth suggestion effect, thereby improving interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a tenth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the ninth aspect,
The advantageous result suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the advantageous result suggestion effect (e.g., chance up effect) in a plurality of modes including a common mode,
Even if the advantageous result suggestion effect of the common aspect is executed, the expectation degree differs depending on the type of the suggestion effect in which the advantageous result suggestion effect is executed (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-12, the expectation degree of a jackpot differs depending on whether the common effect of the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the reach effects A to F).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an increase in the number of advantageous result suggestion display patterns, while drawing the player's attention to which suggestion display is being executed during which a common advantageous result suggestion display is being executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the invention 029SG in aspect 11 is the gaming machine according to aspect 9 or 10,
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of displaying an expectation level corresponding image corresponding to the expectation level of the suggestive performance when executing the suggestive performance, and is also capable of changing the expectation level corresponding image to a different expectation level corresponding image when the advantageous result suggestive performance is executed (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-5, when the characters of a reach title image are changed to red halfway through as a chance-up performance, a display mode of an expectation level image showing the expectation level of a jackpot displayed together with the reach title image is changed (the number of stars displayed as the expectation level image is increased)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the image corresponding to the expectation level changes as the advantageous result suggestive effect is executed, so that it is possible to increase attention to the image corresponding to the expectation level, thereby enabling the player to accurately recognize the expectation level of the suggestive effect.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect of the invention 029SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to eleventh aspects,
a specific image suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a specific image suggestion effect (for example, an active display effect shown in modified example 029SG-1) which is an effect different from the suggestion effect and suggests that the advantageous state will be controlled by a display mode of a specific image (for example, an active display) displayed during the suggestion effect (for example, a part which displays an active display in one of a plurality of display modes in an active display area 029SG005F provided in a display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 19-57 as modified example 029SG-1, and varies the probability of winning depending on which display mode the active display is displayed in);
The specific image suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a common specific image suggestion effect in common to all of the different types of suggestion effects as the specific image suggestion effect (for example, a portion in which an active display can be displayed in a white circle, a blue circle, or a red circle);
In the first development pattern, the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the first suggestion effect executed before the special development effect is lower than the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the third suggestion effect executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-58 as modified example 029SG-1, in the variable display of the variable display of the super reach η in which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed and a reach effect F is further executed before a variable display result is notified as a result of the reach effect A, the rate P2 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect A is lower than the rate P3 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect F).
The rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the third suggestion effect executed after the special development effect is executed in the first development pattern is higher than the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the fourth suggestion effect executed after the special development effect is executed in the second development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-58 as modified example 029SG-1, the rate P3 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach effect F in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η is higher than the rate P1 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach effect E in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ in which a variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of the reach effect B, a reach effect E development notification effect is executed, and then the reach effect E is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the first suggestion effect is executed and then the third suggestion effect is executed, the specific image suggestion effect is executed before the start of the special development effect, thereby reducing the risk that the player will be aware in advance that the third suggestion effect will be executed, and since the common specific image suggestion effect is executed appropriately between the third suggestion effect and the fourth suggestion effect according to the degree of expectation, interest in the game can be increased.

A gaming machine according to a thirteenth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the twelfth aspect,
The specific image suggestion performance execution means is capable of changing the display mode of the specific image from a first mode (e.g., a white circle or a blue circle) to any one of a plurality of modes including a second mode (e.g., a red circle) having a higher expectation than the first mode;
The rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the development performance is lower than the rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode after the development performance is executed (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-2, in a variable display in a fluctuation pattern of a super reach η, a rate P3 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach performance F is set higher than a rate P2 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach performance A, and in a variable display in a fluctuation pattern of a super reach ζ, a rate P1 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach performance E is set higher than a rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach performance B).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easier for the player to recognize the degree of expectation that is controlled to an advantageous state by the display mode of the specific image, and reduces the risk of a decrease in interest in the game due to the player perceiving that the degree of expectation is high in advance because the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the development performance.

A gaming machine according to a fourteenth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the twelfth or thirteenth aspect,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing the special development effect as a third development pattern before the special suggestion effect is executed when the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are not executed and the special suggestion effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-9, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, a part in which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from a timing before the reach when the reach effect A and the reach effect B are not executed).
The rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the special suggestion performance in the third development pattern is higher than the rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode after the special suggestion performance in the third development pattern is executed (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-3, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach λ, the rate P5 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of reach performance I is set higher than the rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of reach performance I).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the special suggestion effect is performed, making it easier for the player to recognize that the special suggestion effect will be executed.

A gaming machine according to a fifteenth aspect of the invention 029SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the twelfth to fourteenth aspects,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A reserved memory means capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 19-14 );
A determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 19-17) capable of determining that the development performance is executed when the variable display is started;
A determination means capable of determining that the development performance will be executed before the determination by the determination means with respect to the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory (for example, in the random number value determination process at the time of winning in variant example 029SG-4, when the CPU 103 determines that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation category) is a Super Reach, the determination means further determines which of the Super Reach fluctuation patterns from Super Reach α to Super Reach λ it is (a part which determines which of Reach performance A to Reach performance I will be executed during the variable display);
Equipped with
The specific image suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing, as the specific image suggestion effect, an effect suggesting that the special development effect will be executed and an effect suggesting that the special development effect will be executed based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, in variant example 029SG-4, in addition to a circle, a triangle, a square, a star, etc. are provided as the display form of the pending memory table display, and a part that can suggest which of reach effects E, F, G, H, and I the pending memory display will develop into depending on which shape is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image suggestion presentation before the variable display starts, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of the first aspect of the invention 033SG is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable state for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
a suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 18 ) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects including a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect I) and a first suggestion effect (for example, reach effect C), a second suggestion effect (for example, reach effect D), and a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect G) which have a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion effect;
a development performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance process during variable display shown in FIG. 18 ) capable of executing a special development performance as a first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestive performance or the second suggestive performance is notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-9 , a portion where a high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed from the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ), and capable of executing a special development performance different from the special development performance as a second development pattern after the first suggestive performance or the second suggestive performance is executed and it is notified that the performance result will not be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-8 , a portion where a reach performance G development notification performance is executed after a variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ);
In the first development pattern, a predetermined performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 18) capable of executing a predetermined performance (for example, a premonition performance shown in FIG. 19-9) before the special development performance is executed;
Equipped with
The first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect have different expectations (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-30(C), the reach effect D has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the reach effect C),
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the special suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-9, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the execution of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and the reach effect I is further executed).
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the special suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-8, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach θ, a variable display result (miss) is once notified as a result of the reach effect C or reach effect D, and then the reach effect G development notification effect is executed, and the reach effect G is further executed).
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, a specific suggestion effect different from the special suggestion effect and the special suggestion effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-9, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ι, a reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the premonition effect is executed, and then a reach effect H is executed).
When controlled to the advantageous state, the rate at which the special development effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-6, when the variable display result is a jackpot, that is, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, the determination rate of the super reach κ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-9) in which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the variable display is higher than the determination rate of the super reach θ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-7) in which a reach effect G development notification effect is executed during the variable display).
The performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is set longer than the length L8 of the execution period of the reach performance G development notification performance),
The special development effects include a first effect (e.g., a blackout effect shown in FIG. 19-10 and FIG. 19-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, a second effect (e.g., an early effect shown in FIG. 19-10 and FIG. 19-55) which is an effect executed after the first effect and in which early information is visibly displayed, and a tertiary effect (e.g., a late effect shown in FIG. 19-10 and FIG. 19-55) which is an effect executed after the second effect and in which late information with a higher degree of emphasis than the early information is visibly displayed,
The rate at which the special development effect is executed after the execution of the predetermined effect in the first suggestion effect is different from the rate at which the special development effect is executed after the execution of the predetermined effect in the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in Figures 19-30 (A) to 19-30 (C), the rate at which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed after a premonition effect when a reach effect C is executed is higher than the rate at which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed after a premonition effect when a reach effect D is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presentation can be diversified by combining the types of suggestive presentation and the types of developing presentation, and a predetermined relationship can be given to the suggestive presentation and the developing presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the suggestive presentation and the developing presentation.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the specific suggestion effect is executed when the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-9, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ι, a reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the premonition effect is executed).
A development pre-effect execution means is provided that can execute a development pre-effect before the special development effect or the specific development effect is executed (for example, a portion in which a pre-effect is executed from a timing prior to the reach effect H development notification effect in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, and a portion in which a pre-effect is executed from a timing prior to the high expectation reach effect development notification effect in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ),
The development pre-effect execution means is capable of executing the development pre-effect common to the case where the special development effect is executed and the case where the specific development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-51, a part in which a pre-effect of a common mode is executed between the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach ι and the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pre-development performance is executed to increase attention to the development performance, while also drawing the player's attention to whether the development performance to be executed is a special development performance or a specific development performance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the third aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the specific suggestion effect is executed when the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-9, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ι, a reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the premonition effect is executed).
a development suggestion performance execution means (for example, a part that executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 18 after the performance control CPU 120 determines to execute the branch destination suggestion performance in the branch destination performance determination process shown in FIG. 19-27 ) capable of executing a special development suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance of pattern Z displaying a branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Z on the image display device 5) that suggests the execution of the special development performance, a specific development suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance of pattern Y displaying a branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Y on the image display device 5) that suggests the execution of the specific development performance, and a common development suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance of pattern X displaying a branch destination suggestion image 029SG005X on the image display device 5);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether a special development suggestion effect, a specific development suggestion effect, or a common development suggestion effect will be executed as the development suggestion effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the fourth aspect of the invention 033SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
The second difference, which is the difference between the rate at which the first suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern, is smaller than the first difference, which is the difference between the rate at which the first suggestive performance is executed in the first development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestive performance is executed in the first development pattern (for example, as shown in 11-30(D), in the case of a super reach κ in which a high expectation reach performance development notification performance and a reach performance I are executed before the performance result is announced as a reach performance C or a reach performance D, Regarding the variation pattern and the variation pattern of the super reach θ in which the reach performance G development notification performance and the reach performance G are executed after the performance result is notified as the reach performance C or the reach performance D, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the difference between the rate at which the reach performance C is executed and the rate at which the reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach θ is 60%, whereas the difference between the rate at which the reach performance C is executed and the rate at which the reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach θ is 40%)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, depending on whether the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, it becomes possible to guess whether it is the first development pattern in which a special development effect is executed, or the second development pattern in which a special development effect is executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to draw attention to whether the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect,
The rate at which the first suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern are the same or approximately the same (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-10, for the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach θ, the execution decision rate of reach performance C and the execution decision rate of reach performance D are the same).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, whether the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, it can be expected that the second development pattern will result in the special development effect being executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the sixth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the fourth or fifth aspect,
The expectation level when the first suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern is the same or substantially the same as the expectation level when the second suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-11, for the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach θ, the jackpot expectation level when the execution of reach performance C is determined and the jackpot expectation level when the execution of reach performance D is determined are the same).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, when the special development effect is executed, it is possible to similarly expect that an advantageous state will be achieved, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the seventh aspect of the invention 033SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth aspects,
a favorable result suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part that executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 18 after the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute a chance-up effect in the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIG. 19-31) capable of executing a first favorable result suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect) that suggests that the result of the first suggestion effect will be favorable to the player while the first suggestion effect is being executed, and a second favorable result suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect) that suggests that the result of the second suggestion effect will be favorable to the player while the second suggestion effect is being executed;
a development suggestion effect execution means capable of executing development suggestion effects (e.g., a meter effect, a reach effect E development suggestion effect, a reach effect G development suggestion effect) that suggest at least the execution of the special development effect (e.g., a part that executes the variable display during effect processing shown in FIG. 18 after the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of a meter effect in the meter effect determination processing shown in FIG. 19-23, determines the execution of a reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 19-26, or determines the execution of a reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 19-29);
Equipped with
The rate at which the development suggestion effect is executed when the first suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern is different from the rate at which the development suggestion effect is executed when the second suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-6, for the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach κ, a portion that can determine whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestion effect at different rates when the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is reach effect C and when it is reach effect D).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the execution rate of the development suggestion effect, which suggests the execution of a special development effect, differs between the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, so that the suggestion that the development suggestion effect will be executed can be appropriately given, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the eighth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh aspects,
a favorable result suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part that executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 18 after the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute a chance-up effect in the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIG. 19-31) capable of executing a first favorable result suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect) that suggests that the result of the first suggestion effect will be favorable to the player while the first suggestion effect is being executed, and a second favorable result suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect) that suggests that the result of the second suggestion effect will be favorable to the player while the second suggestion effect is being executed;
a development suggestion effect execution means capable of executing development suggestion effects (e.g., a meter effect, a reach effect E development suggestion effect, a reach effect G development suggestion effect) that suggest at least the execution of the special development effect (e.g., a part that executes the variable display during effect processing shown in FIG. 18 after the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of a meter effect in the meter effect determination processing shown in FIG. 19-23, determines the execution of a reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 19-26, or determines the execution of a reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 19-29);
Equipped with
The rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the first suggestion effect when the first suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern is different from the rate at which the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the second suggestion effect when the second suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-60 as modified example 029SG-13, in the case of a fluctuation pattern of a super reach κ in which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect and a reach effect I are executed before a variable display result (miss) is notified as a result of the effect of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, a part capable of determining whether or not to execute a chance-up effect at different rates between when the execution of the reach effect C is determined and when the execution of the reach effect D is determined).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the execution rate of the first advantageous result suggestion effect and the second advantageous result suggestion effect, which suggest that the result of the presentation will be advantageous, differs between the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, so that the suggestion of the presentation result can be made in an appropriate manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the seventh or eighth aspect,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the specific suggestion effect is executed when the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-9, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ι, a reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the premonition effect is executed).
The degree of relationship between the suggestion by the first advantageous result suggestion effect and the second advantageous result suggestion effect is that the specific development effect or the special development effect is executed after the execution of the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect, and the relationship between the suggestion effect executed after the execution of the specific development effect or the special development effect is higher than the relationship between the suggestion effect and the result of the suggestion effect executed after the execution of the specific development effect or the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-28(A), the presence or absence of the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern differ in the determination ratio according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display, and the determination ratio does not differ according to the variable display result. In other words, the presence or absence of the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern are determined according to whether or not the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed and whether it develops into any of the reach effects G to I, and which of these reach effects G to I it develops into).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the suggestions given by the first special development effect and the second special development effect are closely related to the execution of a specific development effect or a special development effect close to the time of execution of the first special development effect or the second special development effect, so that the execution of the first special development effect and the second special development effect can increase attention to the specific development effect or the special development effect, thereby improving interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the invention 033SG according to a tenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the seventh to ninth aspects,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the specific suggestion effect is executed when the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-9, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ι, a reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the premonition effect is executed).
The rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed differs before and after the execution of the specific development effect or the special development effect (for example, as shown in variant example 029SG-12, the portion in which the probability of winning differs depending on whether the common effect of the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the reach effects A to F).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by being able to preferably execute the first advantageous outcome suggestion display or the second advantageous outcome suggestion display, it is possible to increase attention as to whether the first or second development pattern will occur.

The gaming machine of the invention 033SG in aspect 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 7 to 10,
The notification modes of the performance results in the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance include a first notification mode in which the fact that the performance will not be controlled to the advantageous state is simply notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-7, in the variable display of the variable pattern of the super reach γ, the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D, and the variable display ends), and a second notification mode in which the fact that the performance will not be controlled to the advantageous state is notified once, and then the fact that the performance will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-7, a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) in which the variable display result is once notified as the performance result of the reach performance A to the reach performance D, and then the variable display result is once notified as a jackpot).
The rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed when the result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the first notification mode is the same as the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed when the result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the second notification mode (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-7, the rate at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Z when the result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D is notified in the first notification mode is the same as the rate at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Z when the result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D is notified in the second notification mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect are notified in the second notification mode, thereby giving the player a sense of surprise, and the process of deciding to execute the first advantageous outcome suggestive effect or the second advantageous outcome suggestive effect can be standardized between the case where the result of the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect is notified in the first notification mode and the case where the result of the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect is notified in the second notification mode, thereby reducing the amount of data required for the process.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect of the invention 033SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the seventh to eleventh aspects,
The notification modes of the performance results in the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance include a first notification mode in which the fact that the performance will not be controlled to the advantageous state is simply notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-7, in the variable display of the variable pattern of the super reach γ, the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D, and the variable display ends), and a second notification mode in which the fact that the performance will not be controlled to the advantageous state is notified once, and then the fact that the performance will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-7, a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) in which the variable display result is once notified as the performance result of the reach performance A to the reach performance D, and then the variable display result is once notified as a jackpot).
When the special development effect is executed after the result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the first notification mode, the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed in the case where it is notified that the advantageous state will be controlled in the suggestion effect executed after the special development effect is different from the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed in the case where the result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the second notification mode (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-8, reach effect C or reach effect D is executed, and this In the case where the variable display result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D is notified that the variable display result is a miss, the reach performance G development notification performance and the reach performance G are executed, and it is notified that the variable display result of the reach performance G is a jackpot (when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern (PB1-7) of the super reach θ jackpot), the percentage at which the chance up performance is executed during the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ jackpot is different from the percentage at which the chance up performance is executed in the variable display in which the performance result (variable display result) of the reach performance C or the reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed can be varied depending on whether or not a special development effect is executed before it is announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the invention 033SG in aspect 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 7 to 12,
The advantageous result suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of advantageous result suggestion effects (e.g., branch destination suggestion effects of pattern X, pattern Y, and pattern Z) including the first advantageous result suggestion effect and the second advantageous result suggestion effect,
The execution rate of the special development effect differs depending on which of the advantageous result suggestion effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-28, the execution rate of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect differs depending on whether the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern X, pattern Y, or pattern Z).
During the execution of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect, if the special development effect is not executed when the special advantageous result suggestion effect or the special suggestion effect with the highest execution rate of the special development effect is executed, the effect result notifies that the effect result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect being executed is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-9, in the case where the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the effect pattern Z but the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is not executed, or in the case where the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is not executed but the reach effect I is executed, the part notifying that the variable display result will be a jackpot).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can give the player a sense of surprise and can also make the player pay attention to whether or not a special development effect will be executed when a special advantageous result suggestion effect or a special suggestion effect is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Figure 19-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature section 029SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 19-1 (A) is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 19-1(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, as shown in FIG. 19-1 (B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot", and the determination result of which of several types of jackpot type should be selected when the variable display result is a "jackpot".

For example, as shown in FIG. 19-1(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determined result.

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game state. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start port. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (commands specifying the judgment result at the time of winning) that indicate the content of the judgment result at the time of winning. Of these, command C4XXH is a design specification command that indicates whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" or not and the type of jackpot (probable win or non-probable win) as the judgment result at the time of winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, that is, whether the random number value for judging the fluctuation pattern will be a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern.

The commands shown in FIG. 19-1(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball having entered each winning port, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 19-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 19-2, in this feature section 029SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 19-3 shows an example of the configuration of the special chart display result judgment table stored in ROM 101. In this feature section 029SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special symbol display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature part 029SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature part 029SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in a probability variable state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature part 029SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature part 029SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 19-4 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 029SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 029SG will be explained using FIG. 19-4 (B). In this feature section 029SG, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Therefore, "Chance Special Jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) chance special jackpot, "Chance Special Jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) chance special jackpot, and "Chance Special Jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) chance special jackpot.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of a jackpot game state of a special jackpot A to a special jackpot C will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the special jackpots A to C, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special games (100 times in this feature part 029SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 19-4(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" to control to a jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to the high opening control accompanying the time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 19-4(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 19-5 shows the variation patterns in this feature part 029SG. In this feature part 029SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", respectively, and for the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. Note that, although this feature section 029SG has one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in this feature section 029SG, eleven types of fluctuation patterns are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns: super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, super reach δ, super reach ε, super reach ζ, super reach η, super reach θ, super reach ι, super reach κ, and super reach λ, but the present invention is not limited to this, and 12 or more types of super reach fluctuation patterns or only 10 or less types may be provided.

The Super Reach fluctuation patterns in this feature part 029SG are: Super Reach α fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-2) and a miss (PA2-2); Super Reach β fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-3) and a miss (PA2-3); Super Reach γ fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-4) and a miss (PA2-4); Super Reach δ fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a miss (PA2-5); Super Reach ε fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a miss (PA2-6); and Super Reach ζ fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-5). There are provided a variation pattern (PA2-7) that results in a miss, a variation pattern (PB1-6) for the variable display result of the super reach η and a variation pattern (PA2-8) that results in a miss, a variation pattern (PB1-7) for the variable display result of the super reach θ and a variation pattern (PA2-9) that results in a miss, a variation pattern (PB1-8) for the variable display result of the super reach ι and a variation pattern (PA2-10) that results in a miss, a variation pattern (PB1-9) for the variable display result of the super reach κ and a variation pattern (PA2-11) that results in a miss, and a variation pattern (PB1-10) for the variable display result of the super reach λ and a variation pattern (PA2-12) that results in a miss.

As shown in Figure 19-5, the special chart change time of the normal reach change pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this feature part 029SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach change pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the probability of a jackpot increasing. Therefore, with some exceptions, in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the probability of a jackpot.

In particular, the special chart change time of the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern, the special chart change time of the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern, the special chart change time of the Super Reach δ fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern, the special chart change time of the Super Reach ε fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the Super Reach δ fluctuation pattern, and the special chart change time of the Super Reach ζ fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the Super The special chart change time is set longer than the special chart change time of the reach ε change pattern, the special chart change time of the super reach η change pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the super reach ζ change pattern, the special chart change time of the super reach θ change pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the super reach η change pattern, the special chart change time of the super reach ι change pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the super reach θ change pattern, and the special chart change time of the super reach κ change pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the super reach ι change pattern.

In addition, among these Super Reach α fluctuation pattern to Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, there are no fluctuation patterns for the Super Reach δ fluctuation pattern and the Super Reach ε fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is a jackpot. In other words, among these Super Reach α fluctuation pattern to Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, excluding the Super Reach δ fluctuation pattern and the Super Reach ε fluctuation pattern, the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern is set to have the shortest special chart fluctuation time and the lowest jackpot expectation, and is set so that the longer the special chart fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

Furthermore, in this feature part 029SG, a Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern is provided as a Super Reach fluctuation pattern with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern. The Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern is exceptionally set to have a special chart fluctuation time longer than the Super Reach ζ fluctuation pattern and shorter than the Super Reach η fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, as described below, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of fluctuation pattern may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may first be determined from these random number values for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

As shown in Figures 19-5 and 19-7 (A), the super reach α variation pattern (PA2-2, PB1-2) is a variation pattern in which reach performance A with an execution period length of L1 is executed as a reach performance of a super reach during variable display, and the variable display result is announced as the performance result of the reach performance A. As shown in Figures 19-5 and 19-7 (B), the super reach β variation pattern (PA2-3, PB1-3) is a variation pattern in which reach performance B with an execution period length of L2 (L2>L1) is executed as a reach performance of a super reach during variable display, and the variable display result is announced as the performance result of the reach performance B.

As shown in Figures 19-7 (A) and 19-7 (B), the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern and the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern are also fluctuation patterns that can execute a meter effect that suggests the execution of a high expectation reach effect development notification effect from the variable display start timing to the reach effect end timing (variable display result notification timing). As mentioned above, the length L2 of the execution period of reach effect B is set to be longer than the length L1 of the execution period of reach effect A, so the length L5 of the meter effect execution period in the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern is set to be longer than the length L4 of the meter effect execution period in the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern (L5>L4).

As shown in Figure 19-5 and Figure 19-7 (C), the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4, PB1-4) is a variation pattern in which reach performance C or reach performance D is executed as the reach performance of the super reach during the variable display, and the variable display result is notified as the performance result of these reach performances C or D. The execution period of both reach performance C and reach performance D is set to length L3. In addition, the super reach γ variation pattern is also a variation pattern capable of executing a branch destination suggestion performance that suggests which of the following will be executed (which notification performance to branch to) during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D: a reach performance H development notification performance that notifies that a reach performance H will be executed after the variable display result is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, and a high expectation reach performance development notification performance that notifies that either reach performance F or reach performance I will be executed.

As shown in Figure 19-5 and Figure 19-7 (D), the super reach δ variation pattern (PA2-5) is a variation pattern in which a reach performance B with an execution period length of L2 is executed as a reach performance of the super reach during the variable display, and then a reach performance E development suggestive performance suggesting development to a reach performance E can be executed (length of the reach performance E development suggestive performance executable period: L6a), and finally, it is a variation pattern that does not develop to a reach performance E and notifies of a miss. Note that the super reach δ variation pattern, like the super reach β variation pattern, is also a variation pattern in which a meter performance can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the reach performance (length of the meter performance executable period: L5), and the length L5 of the meter performance executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the reach performance E development suggestive performance executable period.

As shown in Figure 19-5 and Figure 19-8 (E), the super reach ε variation pattern (PA2-6) is a variation pattern in which, during the variable display, reach performance C or reach performance D (the execution period of either reach performance is L3) is executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and the variable display result is notified that it is a miss, and then a reach performance G development suggestion performance is executed, which suggests development to reach performance G, and finally notifies of a miss without developing to reach performance G. The super reach ε variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a branch destination suggestion performance can be executed during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D.

As shown in Figure 19-5 and Figure 19-8 (F), the super reach ζ variation pattern (PA2-7, PB1-5) is a variation pattern in which a reach performance B with an execution period length of L2 is executed as a reach performance of the super reach during the variable display, and a reach performance E development suggestion performance is executed after notifying that the variable display result is a miss, and then a reach performance E development notification performance (length of execution period of reach performance E development notification performance: L6b) that notifies that it will develop into a reach performance E is executed, and then a reach performance E is executed. The super reach ζ variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a meter performance can be executed (length of meter performance executable period: L5) from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the reach performance B. The length L5 of the meter performance executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the reach performance E development suggestion performance executable period. The length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance is set shorter than the length L5 of the meter performance executable period. In addition, the Super Reach ζ variation pattern has a period length from the start of the reach performance E development notification performance to the end of the reach performance E (the notification timing of the variable display result) set to L11.

As shown in Figure 19-5 and Figure 19-8 (G), the super reach η variation pattern (PA2-8, PB1-6) is a variation pattern in which reach performance A is executed as the reach performance of the super reach during the variable display, and a high expectation reach performance development notification performance that notifies the player that the reach performance A will develop into a reach performance with a high expectation of a jackpot (reach performance F or reach performance I described later in this characteristic part) is executed for L7 (L7>L6b), which is longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance, and then a reach performance F is executed. The super reach η variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a meter performance can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the timing when the reach performance A switches to the high expectation reach performance development notification performance (the length of the meter performance execution period is L4', which is shorter than L4, because the reach performance A switches to the high expectation reach performance development notification performance halfway through). In addition, in the super reach η fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance F (the notification timing of the variable display result) is set to L12 (L12>L11), which is longer than the length of the period L11 from the start timing of the reach performance E development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance E in the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 19-5 and Figure 19-8 (H), the super reach θ variation pattern (PA2-9, PB1-7) is a variation pattern in which reach performance C or reach performance D (the execution period of either reach performance is L3) is executed as the reach performance of the super reach during the variable display, and after notifying that the variable display result is a miss in these reach performances C or reach performance D, a reach performance G development suggestion performance can be executed, and further, a reach performance G development notification performance that notifies that it will develop into reach performance G is executed for L8 (L7>L8), which is shorter than the execution period L7 of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance, and further the reach performance G is executed. The super reach θ variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a branch destination suggestion performance can be executed during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D.

As shown in Figure 19-5 and Figure 19-9 (I), the super reach ι variation pattern (PA2-10, PB1-8) is a variation pattern in which reach performance C or reach performance D is executed as the reach performance of the super reach during variable display, and a pre-performance and a precursor performance are executed in place of reach performance C or reach performance D halfway through reach performance C or reach performance D, and then a reach performance H development notification performance is executed to notify that the performance will develop into reach performance H, thereby executing the reach performance H. The super reach ι variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a branch destination suggestion performance can be executed during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D.

As shown in Figure 19-5 and Figure 19-9 (J), the super reach κ variation pattern (PA2-11, PB1-9) is a variation pattern in which reach performance C or reach performance D is executed as the reach performance of the super reach during variable display, and a pre-performance and a precursor performance are executed in place of reach performance C or reach performance D halfway through reach performance C or reach performance D, and further a high expectation reach performance development notification performance with an execution period length of L7 is executed to execute reach performance I. The super reach κ variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a branch destination suggestion performance can be executed during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D. In addition, in the super reach κ fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) is set to L13 (L13>L12>L11), which is longer than the length of the period L12 from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of reach performance F in the super reach η fluctuation pattern.

The Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern (PA2-12, PB1-10) is a fluctuation pattern that executes a high expectation reach performance development notification performance with a duration of L7 from a timing before the reach in other Super Reach fluctuation patterns during variable display, and executes the reach performance I. The Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern is also a fluctuation pattern that can execute a meter performance from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance (since the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed from a timing before the reach, the duration of the meter performance execution period is L4'' which is even shorter than L4': L4>L4'>L4''). In addition, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) of the Super Reach κ is set to L13 (L13>L12>L11), the same as the Super Reach κ.

In particular, as shown in Figures 19-10 (A) and 19-10 (B), the high expectation reach performance development notification performance in this feature section 029SG includes a blackout performance in which the display area of the image display device 5 is darkened to make it difficult to see the performance image displayed on the image display device 5, an early performance in which the opening lines are displayed on the image display device 5 after the blackout performance, a switching performance after the early performance, a late performance in which the closing lines are displayed on the image display device 5 after the switching performance, and a movable body performance in which the movable body 32 is dropped (operated) from an origin position above the image display device 5 to a performance position overlapping with approximately the center of the front of the display area of the image display device 5 after the late performance.

As shown in Figures 19-10(B) and 19-55, the first stage performance is a performance in which the lines spoken by the character displayed on the image display device 5 are displayed as a text image 029SG007 in the display area of the image display device 5 and are also output as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figures 19-10(B) and 19-55, the latter stage performance follows the former stage performance and displays the lines spoken by the character as a text image 029SG008 in the display area of the image display device 5, and also outputs the lines as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figure 19-10 (B), the opening line is "You're not alone...we'll show you everyone's power!", and the closing line is "Miracle attack!".

More specifically, the first stage performance is composed of a first period and a second period, and in the first period, the phrase "You're not alone..." is output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the seven letters of "You're not alone..." are displayed in the display area of image display device 5. Then, in the second period, the phrase "I'll show you everyone's power!" is output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the 12 letters of "I'll show you everyone's power!" are displayed below the letters "You're not alone..." in the display area of image display device 5. The second stage performance is also composed of a first period and a second period, and in the first period, the phrase "Miracle" is output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the four letters of "Miracle" are displayed in the display area of image display device 5. During the second period, the line "Attack!" is output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the five letters of "Attack!" are displayed below the word "Miracle" in the display area of the image display device 5.

In other words, in the front and back performances of this feature part 029SG, the number of characters displayed in the first period of the front performance is greater than the number of characters displayed in the first period of the back performance, and the number of characters displayed in the second period of the front performance is greater than the number of characters displayed in the second period of the back performance.

Also, as shown in FIG. 19-10 (B), the display manner of the lines in the early performance differs from the display manner of the lines in the late performance, and in particular, the lines in the late performance are displayed in a manner that is more emphasized than the display manner of the lines in the early performance.

For example, in the first stage performance, the background screen and character image of the image display device 5 are displayed in a dark manner, and a text image 029SG007 consisting of multiple characters (e.g., "You're not alone...") is displayed in a manner that gradually becomes larger and brighter (fade-in) during the first period, and then a text image 029SG007 consisting of multiple characters (e.g., "I'll show you all our power!") is displayed in a manner that gradually becomes larger and brighter (fade-in) during the second period. Also, after the text image 029SG007 (e.g., "You're not alone...I'll show you all our power!") is displayed at its largest and brightest, it is displayed in a manner that gradually becomes smaller and darker (fade-out) and finally disappears. Note that the text image 029SG007 may move while fading in or out.

On the other hand, in the latter stage performance, the background screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in a brighter manner than in the former stage performance, and multiple character images 029SG008 consisting of one character (for example, "Mi", "Ra", "Ku", "Ru") are displayed (dynamically displayed) in the first period as if they rotate and move from the right side of the display screen toward the center (frame-in), and multiple character images 029SG008 consisting of one character (for example, "A", "Ta", "T", "Ku", "!") are displayed (dynamically displayed) in the second period as if they rotate and move from the bottom side of the display screen toward the center (frame-in). Also, after these character images 029SG008 (for example, "Miracle Attack!") are displayed largest and brightest, they move radially outward and are finally displayed in a manner that disappears outside the display screen (frame-out).

As shown in Figure 19-10 (B), the character image 029SG007 in the first stage performance is small, flat (two-dimensional), moves slowly (the speed at which the display mode changes due to fading in) and is displayed at a low brightness. On the other hand, the character image 029SG008 in the second stage performance is larger, three-dimensional (three-dimensional), moves faster (the speed at which the display mode changes due to framing in (movement speed)) and is displayed at a high brightness than the character image 029SG007 in the first stage performance (see Figure 19-55).

In addition, as long as the maximum size and brightness of the character image 029SG008 in the latter performance is larger and brighter than the maximum size and brightness of the character image 029SG007 in the former performance, the size and brightness of a portion of the character image when fading in or framing in may be inversely related. Also, although the content of the dialogue differs between the former and latter performances, at least some of the content may be the same.

In this way, it can be said that the larger the size of the character images that make up the dialogue, the higher the degree of emphasis; the more three-dimensional the form is than the more two-dimensional, the faster the movement is than the slower the movement, and the higher the brightness is than the lower the degree of emphasis. In the above, the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character images are exemplified in the latter stage performance as being more emphasized than in the former stage performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the degree of emphasis of at least one element of the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character images in the latter stage performance is higher than that of the character images in the former stage performance. In addition to the above, for example, the degree of emphasis may include a higher degree of emphasis for thicker characters than for thin characters, and a higher degree of saturation or brightness than for low colors. Furthermore, the degree of emphasis may be increased not only by the display mode of the character images themselves, but also by displaying special images such as effect images around the character images.

Figure 19-6 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature part 029SG. In this feature part 029SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-6, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-5 (super reach ζ jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-6 (super reach η jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-7 (super reach θ jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-8 (super reach ι jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-9 (super reach κ jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-10 (super reach λ jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table.

When using the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table to determine the fluctuation pattern, the determination ratio of PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot) is set to the lowest, followed by PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot), PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ jackpot), PB1-6 (fluctuation pattern of super reach η jackpot), PB1-7 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-8 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-9 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-10 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-11 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-12 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-13 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-14 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-15 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-16 (fluctuation pattern of super reach η jackpot), PB1-17 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-18 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-19 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-20 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-21 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-22 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-23 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-24 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-25 (fluctuation pattern The determination rate can be set to increase in the following order: PB1-1 (Pear Reach θ jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-8 (Super Reach ι jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-9 (Super Reach κ jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-10 (Super Reach λ jackpot fluctuation pattern) (Determination rate of each Super Reach fluctuation pattern when selecting the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table: PB1-2<PB1-3<PB1-4<PB1-5<PB1-6<PB1-7<PB1-8<PB1-9<PB1-10).

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the same jackpot variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to provide multiple jackpot variation pattern determination tables with different determination rates for any of PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3, and to provide multiple jackpot variation pattern determination tables with different determination rates for at least two or more jackpot variation patterns, and to determine the variation pattern using different jackpot variation pattern determination tables depending on the type of jackpot. By doing this, it is possible to create a variation pattern that is easily determined for each type of jackpot, so that the player can pay attention to which variable display pattern has resulted in the variable display result being a jackpot, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A as PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach γ miss fluctuation pattern), It is determined from the following: PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ miss), PA2-6 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ε miss), PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ζ miss), PA2-8 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach η miss), PA2-9 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ miss), PA2-10 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ι miss), PA2-11 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ miss), and PA2-12 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach λ miss).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B as PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ miss), It is determined from the following: PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ miss), PA2-6 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ε miss), PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ζ miss), PA2-8 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach η miss), PA2-9 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ miss), PA2-10 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ι miss), PA2-11 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ miss), and PA2-12 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach λ miss).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C as PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ miss), It is determined from the following: PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ miss), PA2-6 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ε miss), PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ζ miss), PA2-8 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach η miss), PA2-9 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ miss), PA2-10 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ι miss), PA2-11 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ miss), and PA2-12 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach λ miss).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D as PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach γ miss fluctuation pattern). , PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ miss), PA2-6 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ε miss), PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ζ miss), PA2-8 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach η miss), PA2-9 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ miss), PA2-10 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ι miss), PA2-11 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ miss), PA2-12 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach λ miss).

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature part 029SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart fluctuation time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart being 3 or 4, or the time-saving state, is high, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

When determining the fluctuation pattern using miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D, the determination ratio of non-reach miss fluctuation patterns (PA1-1 for miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, PA1-2 for miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, PA1-3 for miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, and PA1-4 for miss fluctuation pattern determination table D) is set highest, followed by PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach γ miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-5 (super reach δ miss fluctuation pattern), PA2- The determination ratio can be set to decrease in the order of PA2-6 (Super Reach ε miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-7 (Super Reach ζ miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-8 (Super Reach η miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-9 (Super Reach θ miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-10 (Super Reach ι miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-11 (Super Reach κ miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-12 (Super Reach λ miss fluctuation pattern) (Determination ratio of each Super Reach fluctuation pattern when the miss fluctuation pattern determination table is selected: PA2-12<PA2-11<PA2-10<PA2-9<PA2-8<PA2-7<PA2-6<PA2-5<PA2-4<PA2-3<PA2-2).

By setting the determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern in each fluctuation pattern judgment table as described above, for the Super Reach fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern is set to the lowest, the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern is set to be higher than the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern is set to be higher than the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach ζ fluctuation pattern is set to be higher than the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach The jackpot expectation of the Super Reach η fluctuation pattern is set higher than that of the Super Reach ζ fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach θ fluctuation pattern is set higher than that of the Super Reach η fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach ι fluctuation pattern is set higher than that of the Super Reach θ fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern is set higher than that of the Super Reach ι fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern is set higher than that of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern. As for the Super Reach δ fluctuation pattern and the Super Reach ε fluctuation pattern, as mentioned above, only the fluctuation patterns in the case where the variable display result is a miss are provided, so the jackpot expectation is 0.

Next, the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 029SG will be described. In the display area of the image display device 5, the effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are arranged. In addition, a first reserved memory display area 029SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 029SG005U are set in two places on the left and right of the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5. In the first reserved memory display area 029SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 029SG005U, a reserved memory display that identifiably displays the reserved memory number (special reserved memory number) of the variable display corresponding to the special game is displayed. In this characteristic part 029SG, these reserved displays can be displayed in multiple display modes, and a pre-reading notice display (also called a reserved display notice display) that changes the rate at which the reserved memory display is displayed in the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display (the probability of a jackpot) can be executed.

Furthermore, on the right side of the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 029SG, a meter 029SG005M is displayed, the display state of which can be changed in five stages (six stages if the state in which the meter performance is not executed is included) as the meter performance described above.

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 029SG is provided with a game control data holding area 029SG150 as shown in FIG. 19-12, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 029SG150 shown in FIG. 19-12 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 029SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 029SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 029SG151C, a game control flag setting section 029SG152, a game control timer setting section 029SG153, a game control counter setting section 029SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 029SG155.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit 029SG151A stores reservation data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started, but in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit 029SG151A associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 029SG151A thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit 029SG151B stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit 029SG151B associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 029SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 029SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 029SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 029SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 029SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 029SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 029SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 11 is provided with a performance control data holding area 029SG190 as shown in FIG. 19-13(A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 029SG190 shown in FIG. 19-13(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 029SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 029SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 029SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 029SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 029SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 029SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 029SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 029SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 029SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 029SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 029SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 029SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 029SG, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 029SG194A as shown in FIG. 19-13 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 029SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 029SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed variably. In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 029SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being displayed variably. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, a set of four commands, namely, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 029SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and reserved memory number notification command separately in the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A of this characteristic part 029SG, a memory area is reserved for each storage area (entry) so that the hold display flag, which is set to a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the start opening winning designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the hold memory display, depending on whether or not the display pattern associated with the decision on whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the pre-reading preview setting process (Fig. 19-20) is undetermined due to the occurrence of a new start winning, can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special chart hold memory and the second special chart hold memory.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process described later, the hold display flag is set to "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold memory display, and the hold memory display in the normal display mode (e.g., a white circle) is displayed in the first hold memory display area 029SG5D and the second hold memory display area 029SG5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5. When the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is determined, the hold display flag is set to "1" (blue circle) or "2" (red circle) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode (e.g., a blue circle or a red circle) different from the normal display mode, and the hold memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first hold memory display area 029SG5D and the second hold memory display area 029SG5U, and the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is set to notify the possibility of a jackpot or a super reach.

When a start win is made to the first start win port, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 029SG194A, and when a start win is made to the second start win port, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 029SG194A. When a start win is made, the start win port designation command to the reserved memory number notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start win port designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area corresponding to the last "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory or the second special symbol reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 029SG194A shown in FIG. 19-13(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 19-13(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1" are shifted to buffer number "0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning judgment process of this feature part 029SG executed in step S101 of Fig. 14 will be described based on Fig. 19-14. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, is in the ON state based on the detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A (step 029SGS101a). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is in the ON state (step 029SGS101a; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 029SGS102). The CPU 103 can specify the first reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. When the first reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in step 029SGS102 (step 029SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is set to "1" (step 029SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step 029SGS101a (step 029SGS101a; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step 029SGS102 (step 029SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on or not based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B (step 029SGS101b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step 029SGS101b; Y), it is determined whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 029SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special figures by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in step 029SGS105 (step 029SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is set to "2" (step 029SGS106).

After executing either step 029SGS103 or step 029SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 029SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (step 029SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step 029SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 (step 029SGS109). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step 029SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 029SG151A, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 029SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of step 029SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of step 029SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 029SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 13.

Following the processing of step 029SGS111, a random number value determination process is executed at the time of winning (step 029SGS112). After that, a setting is made to send a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (step 029SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 13 after the special pattern process process is completed.

After executing the process of step 029SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 029SGS115), and the process proceeds to step 029SGS104. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step 029SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 029SGS116), and the start winning process is terminated. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

Figure 19-15 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 029SGS112 of Figure 19-14 as a winning random number value determination process. In this feature section 029SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, a determination is made by the normal special symbol process (step S22 of Figure 14, Figure 19-16) described below as to whether or not to control the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols) to a "jackpot" and to control the game to a jackpot. Also, in the variable pattern setting process (step S23 of Figure 14, Figure 19-17) described below, a determination is made of a variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbols. On the other hand, apart from these judgments, when the game ball is detected in the start winning hole (first start winning hole or second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number judgment process of step 029SGS112 to judge whether or not it is judged that the jackpot pattern is to be stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and judge whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that entered the start winning hole is started, that is, before it is decided whether or not it is a jackpot at the start of the variable display, it is judged that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and which category of variable display mode the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be, and based on this judgment result, the performance control CPU 120 or the like executes a notice performance such as a pre-reading notice performance, as described later.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 19-15(A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag and the special probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 (step 029SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies the special probability state when the special probability flag is on, identifies the time-saving state when the special probability flag is off and the time-saving flag is on, and identifies the normal state when both the special probability flag and the time-saving flag are off.

Following the processing of step 029SGS121, the display result judgment table shown in FIG. 19-3 is selected and set (step 029SGS122). After that, it is judged whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result extracted in step 029SGS109 of FIG. 19-14 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (step 029SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected by the processing of step 029SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one to judge whether there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 029SGS123 that the winning combination is not within the winning combination range, that is, if it is determined that the winning combination is not a winning combination in the variable display (step 029SGS123; N), that is, if the variable display result in the variable display is a "miss", the transmission setting of the first pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "miss" (step 029SGS128), is executed, and it is determined whether the time-saving flag is on or not, that is, whether the current game state is in the time-saving state or not (step 029SGS129). If the time-saving flag is off (step 029SGS129; N), the losing combination pattern determination table A is selected and set, and if the time-saving flag is on (step 029SGS129; Y), the losing combination pattern determination table D is selected and set (step 029SGS131). In addition, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table A is a loss fluctuation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved memories is two or less. In addition, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is a loss fluctuation pattern determination table used when the game state is a high base state in which time-saving control is being executed.

Also, if it is determined in step 029SGS123 that the value is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot will occur during variable display (step 029SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 19-15(A), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 029SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table according to the variable special chart (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2") specified in response to the start port buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for jackpot type determination, it is determined which of the multiple types the jackpot type is determined to be.

In addition, the sending setting of the symbol designation command according to the type of jackpot determined is executed (step 029SGS133), i.e., the second symbol designation command in case of a sure jackpot A, the third symbol designation command in case of a sure jackpot B, the fourth symbol designation command in case of a sure jackpot C, and the fifth symbol designation command in case of a non-variable jackpot, and the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 029SGS135), and the process proceeds to step 029SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 029SGS130, step 029SGS131, and step 029SGS135, the variable category according to the range of judgment values that includes the random number value MR3 is determined using each of the variable pattern judgment tables set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variable pattern (step 029SGS138). In this characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 19-15 (B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", a variable category that is a variable display mode of "non-reach" in common regardless of the total reserved memory number, a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach) are provided, and it is sufficient to determine whether such a variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, a variable category designation command according to the result of the processing in step 029SGS138 is set up to be sent to the performance control board 12 (step 029SGS139), and the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

Figure 19-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of Figure 14 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 19-16, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" or not (step 029SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 029SGS141, the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 may be read, and it may be judged whether the read value is "0" or not.

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 029SGS141 (step 029SGS141; N), the reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 029SGS142, the second special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the second special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 029SGS143).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 029SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 029SGS141 (step 029SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 029SGS145). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 029SGS145, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 may be read and it may be determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 029SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 029SGS141, and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

The special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and the special chart game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the first special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 029SGS145 (step 029SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 029SGS146, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the first special chart reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 029SGS147).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "1" (step 029SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS149.

In step 029SGS149, the special pattern display result judgment table shown in FIG. 19-3 is selected and set as the table to be used for determining whether the special pattern display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special pattern display result of "jackpot" or "miss" to determine whether the special pattern display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 029SGS150a). In addition, in this step 029SGS150a, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, if the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (high probability state), it is judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged as a "miss". Also, if the probability of a jackpot is low and the probability flag is off, if the random number value MR1 used to determine the result of the special chart display falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is determined to be a "miss."

In this way, in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected in step 029SGS149, different judgment values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability), so in the processing of step 029SGS150a, whether or not to set the special chart display result as a "jackpot" is determined using different judgment data (judgment values) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a high probability state, so that when the game state is a high probability state, it is judged (determined) as a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is determined in step 029SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 029SGS150a; Y), the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 sets the jackpot flag to ON (step 029SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 19-4 (A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of the multiple types (step 029SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types according to whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each jackpot type of "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", or "variable jackpot C" in the jackpot type determination table (step 029SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 029SGS154, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special pattern as the variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state will be controlled to a time-saving state or a high probability state, which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by setting, for example, a jackpot type buffer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 (step 029SGS155). As an example, if the jackpot type is a "non-high probability jackpot" corresponding to a non-high probability jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0", if it is a "high probability A" corresponding to a high probability jackpot A, it can be set to "1", if it is a "high probability B" corresponding to a high probability jackpot B, it can be set to "2", and if it is a "high probability C" corresponding to a high probability jackpot C, it can be set to "3".

After step 029SGS155 is completed, or if it is determined in step 029SGS150a that the game is not a "jackpot" (step 029SGS150a; N), a fixed special symbol is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is set to the on state) and the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game state. As an example, in accordance with the pre-determined result of the special symbol display result being a "miss," a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if it is determined in step 029SGS150a that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot," if the jackpot type in step 029SGS154 is "high probability jackpot A," a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot B," a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "non-high probability jackpot," a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C," a special symbol showing the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are merely examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 029SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 029SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 029SGS145 (step 029SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 029SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Figure 19-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of Figure 14 as the fluctuation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in Figure 19-17, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set to the ON state (step 029SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is set to the ON state (step 029SGS161; Y), the CPU 103 selects and sets the fluctuation pattern determination table for the jackpot (step 029SGS164).

If the judgment in step 029SGS161 indicates that the jackpot flag is not set to the ON state (step 029SGS161; N), the game control flag setting unit judges whether the time-saving flag is set to the ON state to judge whether the game state is in a special state or a time-saving state and time-saving control is being performed (step 029SGS168). Then, if the time-saving flag is set to the ON state (step 029SGS168; Y), the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns (step 029SGS169).

On the other hand, when time-saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time-saving flag is not on (step 029SGS168; N), the number of reserved memories of variable special charts is identified, for example by reading the stored value of the reserved memory number counter for variable special charts provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, and it is determined whether the reserved memory number of the identified variable special chart is 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170; N), the loss variable pattern determination table A is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 029SGS171).

In addition, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 1 or 2 (step 029 SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 3 (step 029 SGS172).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 3 (step 029SGS172; Y), the loss variable pattern determination table B is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 029SGS173).

Also, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 3, that is, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 4 (step 029SGS172; N), the program selects and sets the miss variable pattern determination table C as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable pattern (step 029SGS174), and proceeds to step 029SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 029SGS164, step 029SGS169, step 029SGS171, step 029SGS173, and step 029SGS174, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of several types by referring to the selected (set) jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, special win fluctuation pattern determination table, or miss fluctuation pattern determination table A to D based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in a fluctuation random number buffer (step 029SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, step 029SGS175 determines the variation pattern, and determines whether the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to "reach." In other words, step 029SGS170 includes a process for determining whether the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to a reach state when the variable display result is a "miss."

After the variation pattern is determined in step 029SGS175, settings are made to start the variation of the special patterns so that either a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B is started according to the variable special pattern designation buffer value (step 029SGS176). As an example, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B.

Following the processing of step 029SGS176, settings are made to send various commands for when the special pattern starts to change (step 029SGS177). For example, when the special pattern change designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sequentially sends the game state designation command, the first variable display start command, the change pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The CPU 103 stores the setting data indicating the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first change start command table prepared in advance in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second variable start command table prepared in advance in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 in order to sequentially transmit the game state designation command, second variable display start command, variable pattern designation command, variable display result designation command, and second reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the process of step 029SGS177, the special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the result of the determination of the fluctuation pattern, is set (step 029SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the stop display of the confirmed special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result). After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step 029SGS179), and the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 029SGS177, each time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 13 is executed after the variable pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 will sequentially transmit a game state designation command, a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command to the presentation control board 12. The order in which these presentation control commands are transmitted can be changed arbitrarily, and for example, the variable display result designation command may be transmitted first, followed by the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variable pattern designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command.

Figure 19-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 14 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol change process in step S112 to end the change of the special symbol, and controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop displaying the stopped symbol (step 029SGS180). If the change special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the change of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and if the change special symbol designation buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the change of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, the CPU 103 controls to send a symbol determination command to the performance control board 12 (step 029SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is set to ON (step 029SGS182). If the jackpot flag is set to ON (step 029SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the special probability flag and the time-saving flag to OFF (step 029SGS184) if they are set to ON, and sets the performance control board 12 to send a hit start 1 designation command (special probability jackpot A), a hit start 2 designation command (special probability jackpot B), a hit start 3 designation command (special probability jackpot C), or a hit start 4 designation command (non-special probability jackpot) according to the type of jackpot stored (step 029SGS185).

The CPU 103 then performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 029 SGS186).

Then, the jackpot display time timer is set to a value equivalent to the jackpot display time (the time for announcing the occurrence of a jackpot, for example, on the image display device 5) (step 029SGS187). Also, the number of times the jackpot opening counter has been opened (for example, 10 times for a non-variable jackpot or a variable jackpot A, 5 times for a variable jackpot B, and 2 times for a variable jackpot C) is set (step 029SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step 029SGS189), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off (step 029SGS182; N), in step 029SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving counter value is "0." If the time-saving counter value is "0" (step 029SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step 029SGS190; N), that is, if the time-saving counter is in a high base state with remaining time-saving times, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step 029SGS191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is "0" or not (step 029SGS193). If it is not "0" (step 029SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 029SGS193; Y), the process clears the time-saving flag to turn it off in order to end the time-saving control (step 029SGS194), sets the transmission of a game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, low probability low base state) corresponding to the state of the probability flag or the time-saving flag (step 029SGS195), and then proceeds to step 029SGS196.

In step 029SGS196, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the normal processing of the special pattern, and then the special pattern stop processing is terminated.

Figure 19-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of Figure 14 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 029SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 029SGS201; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time for which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 029SGS202), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is running (step 029SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 029SGS203). The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 029SGS204). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 029SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 029SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-variable jackpot (step 029SGS205; N), the variable jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS207), the time-saving flag is turned on (step 029SGS208), the time-saving counter is set to "0" (step 029SGS209), and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 029SGS205; Y), steps 029SGS211 and 029SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set the time-saving counter to "100", and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS213.

In step 029SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and a jackpot end command is sent according to the type of jackpot (step 029SGS214). Then, after sending a game state command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game state based on the ON-state probability flag and time-saving flag (step 029SGS215), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of the special pattern (step 029SGS216).

Next, the operation of the performance control board 12 will be described. Figures 19-20 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of Figure 14 as the advance notice setting process. In the advance notice setting process shown in Figures 19-20, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the start win reception command buffer 029SG194A (step 029SGS241), and determines whether there is a new command stored at the start win by checking whether there is an entry with the pending display flag value not set (step 029SGS242).

If there is no entry with the reserved display flag value not set (step 029SGS242; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry with the reserved display flag value not set (step 029SGS242; Y), it is further determined whether the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, whether the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a miss (step 029SGS243). If the symbol designation command is other than the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot (step 029SGS243; N), based on the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot, a pre-reading notice performance judgment table (not shown) is referenced to determine whether to execute a pre-reading notice performance and the display pattern when the pre-reading notice performance is executed (step 029SGS245).

In step 029SGS245, for example, the determination ratio shown in FIG. 19-21 (A) is used to determine whether or not to execute the preview performance and the display pattern (preview type). Specifically, two types of display patterns (preview types) for the preview performance are provided: display pattern α and display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern for the preview performance is determined to be display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in a blue circle in the first reserved memory display area 029SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 029SG5U, and when the display pattern (preview type) for the preview performance is determined to be display pattern β, the reserved memory display is displayed in a red circle in the first reserved memory display area 029SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 029SG5U.

In step 029SGS245, as shown in FIG. 19-21(A), for example, it is possible to determine not to execute the pre-reading preview performance 5% of the time, to execute the pre-reading preview performance in display pattern α 30% of the time, and to execute the pre-reading preview performance in display pattern β 65% of the time.

Also, in step 029SGS243, if the symbol designation command of an entry for which the pending display flag value is not set is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a symbol designation command indicating a miss (step 029SGS243; Y), the variable category indicated by the variable category designation command of the entry is identified (step 029SGS247). Specifically, if the variable category designation command of the entry is C600H, it is identified as the category of the "non-reach" variable pattern, if it is C601H, it is identified as the category of the "super reach" variable pattern, and if it is C602H, it is identified as the category of the "other" variable pattern which includes normal reach.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading preview performance extracted, for example, from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit 029SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in step 029SGS247, the pre-reading preview performance judgment table for misses (not shown) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notice type) when the pre-reading preview performance is executed (step 029SGS248).

In step 029SGS248, the display pattern (preview type) and whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance are determined using a determination ratio such as that shown in FIG. 19-21(B). In the example of setting the determination ratio shown in FIG. 19-21(B), the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (preview type) is varied depending on the category of the variation pattern identified in the processing of step 029SGS247.

In step 029SGS247, as shown in FIG. 19-21(B), for example, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is "non-reach", it is determined that the look-ahead preview performance will not be executed at a rate of 95%, that the look-ahead preview performance will be executed in display pattern α at a rate of 5%, and that the look-ahead preview performance will be executed in display pattern β at a rate of 0%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is "other", it is determined that the look-ahead preview performance will not be executed at a rate of 75%, that the look-ahead preview performance will be executed in display pattern α at a rate of 20%, and that the look-ahead preview performance will be executed in display pattern β at a rate of 5%. And, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is "super reach", it is determined that the look-ahead preview performance will not be executed at a rate of 65%, that the look-ahead preview performance will be executed in display pattern α at a rate of 25%, and that the look-ahead preview performance will be executed in display pattern β at a rate of 10%.

With this setting, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead preview performance, the variable display result is more likely to be a jackpot than when it is decided not to execute the look-ahead preview performance, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead preview performance. Furthermore, when the look-ahead preview performance is executed, the variable display result is more likely to be a jackpot when the look-ahead preview performance is executed in display pattern β than when it is executed in display pattern α, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to which display pattern the reserved memory display that is the target of the look-ahead preview performance will be displayed in.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the execution or non-execution of the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern are determined at the same rate regardless of the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, the execution or non-execution of the pre-reading preview performance and the determination rate of the display pattern may be different depending on the jackpot type. In this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which jackpot type jackpot game state is controlled depending on whether the pre-reading preview performance is executed or which display pattern the reserved memory display is displayed in.

After executing step 029SGS248, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a decision was made in step 029SGS247 to execute a pre-reading preview performance, i.e., whether or not the display pattern (preview type) was decided to be either display pattern α or display pattern β (step 029SGS249).

After step 029SGS245 is executed or if it is determined that a preview performance is to be executed (step 029SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (preview type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 029SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (preview type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is display pattern α that indicates the pending memory display with a blue circle, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and if the display pattern (preview type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is display pattern β that indicates the pending memory display with a red circle, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS252.

Also, in step 029SGS249, if it has not been decided that a preview performance will be performed (step 029SGS249; N), the pending display flag for that entry is set to "0", which indicates a white circle (step 029SGS250), and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS252.

After executing step 029SGS246 or step 029SGS250, the performance control CPU 120 updates the hold display based on the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A (step 029SGS252). As a result, the hold memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the "0", "1", or "2" set in the hold display flag.

Figure 19-22 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of Figure 18 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 19-22, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS271). If the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 029SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 029SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

Also, if the first variable start command reception flag is off in step 029SGS271 (step 029SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273). If the second variable start command reception flag is off (step 029SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 029SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 029SGS272 or step 029SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 029SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 029SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 029SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned to "7" as the stop symbol. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot C, the stop symbol is determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned to even symbols as the stop symbol. Also, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, a combination of decorative patterns in which three patterns are not aligned (a miss pattern) is determined as the stopping pattern. Also, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a reach variation pattern, a reach-miss combination (a miss pattern) in which the left and right patterns are the same but the center pattern is different is determined as the stopping pattern.

When determining these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping symbol, and determine the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative symbols is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a meter performance determination process to determine whether or not to execute a meter performance and the performance pattern (step 029SGS277), and judges whether or not the change pattern of the variable display is a Super Reach change pattern (step 029SGS278). Note that whether or not the change pattern of the variable display is a Super Reach change pattern can be determined by whether or not the change pattern designation command read in the processing of step 029SGS275 is a Super Reach change pattern.

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS278; N), proceed to step 029SGS283. If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS278; Y), it is further determined whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of the super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ fluctuation patterns (step 029SGS280).

If the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is any of the fluctuation patterns of Super Reach α, Super Reach β, Super Reach δ, Super Reach ζ, Super Reach η, or Super Reach λ (step 029 SGS280; N), it is further determined whether the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ or Super Reach ζ (step 029 SGS281). If the change pattern of the variable display is that of a Super Reach δ or Super Reach ζ (step 029SGS281; Y), a reach performance E development suggestion effect determination process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a reach performance E development suggestion effect, and the process proceeds to step 029SGS283 (step 029SGS282); if the change pattern of the variable display is that of a Super Reach α, Super Reach β, Super Reach η, or Super Reach λ (step 029SGS281; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS283 without executing a reach performance E development notification effect determination process.

In addition, in the processing of step 029SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern and proceeds to step 029SGS289.

Then, in step 029SGS280, if the change pattern of the variable display is any one of the change patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ (step 029SGS280; Y), a branch destination suggestion effect determination process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern (step 029SGS284). Then, it is determined whether the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach ε or Super Reach θ (step 029SGS285).

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is one of the Super Reach γ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ fluctuation patterns (step 029SGS285; N), proceed to step 029SGS289. If the variable display fluctuation pattern is one of the Super Reach ε or Super Reach θ fluctuation patterns (step 029SGS285; Y), execute a reach performance G development suggestion performance decision process to determine whether or not to execute a reach performance G development suggestion performance (step 029SGS286). Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines the reach performance of the super reach to be executed during the variable display from reach performance C and reach performance D according to the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS287), selects a process table according to the determined reach performance and fluctuation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS289 (step 029SGS288).

In the processing of step 029SGS287, if the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 19-30(A), if the fluctuation pattern is a Super Reach γ (PB1-4) fluctuation pattern, the execution of Reach performance C is determined at a rate of 50%, and the execution of Reach performance D is determined at a rate of 50%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is a Super Reach θ (PB1-7) fluctuation pattern, the execution of Reach performance C is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution of Reach performance D is determined at a rate of 70%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is a Super Reach ι (PB1-8) fluctuation pattern, the execution of Reach performance C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of Reach performance D is determined at a rate of 100%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is a Super Reach κ (PB1-9) fluctuation pattern, the execution of Reach performance C is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of Reach performance D is determined at a rate of 80%.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIG. 19-30 (B), if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach γ (PA2-4), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 90%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 10%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach ε (PA2-6), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 80%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 20%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach θ (PA2-9), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 70%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 30%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach ι (PA2-10), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 100%. Furthermore, if the fluctuation pattern is that of Super Reach κ (PA2-11), the execution of reach performance C is determined with a probability of 60%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined with a probability of 40%.

As shown in Figures 19-30(A) and 19-30(B), the execution of reach effects C and D is determined at different rates according to the variation pattern when the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss, so that the overall expectation of a jackpot is set higher for reach effects D than for reach effects C, as shown in Figure 19-30(C).

In addition, regardless of the variable display result, when the variable display is executed in the Super Reach ι fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern in which a reach performance H development notification performance and a reach performance H are executed after the execution of a pre-performance and a premonition performance), the execution of a reach performance D is always decided. On the other hand, when the variable display is executed in the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern in which a high expectation reach performance development notification performance and a reach performance I are executed after the execution of a pre-performance and a premonition performance), there are cases in which a reach performance C or a reach performance D is executed.

In other words, in this feature section 029SG, for the variation patterns in which the pre-performance and premonition performance are executed during the variable display (the variation patterns of the Super Reach ι and the Super Reach κ), the rate at which the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed in this feature section 029 after the execution of the pre-performance and premonition performance (the rate at which the reach performance I with the highest expectation of a jackpot is executed) is set higher when the execution of the reach performance C is decided than when the execution of the reach performance D is decided. Therefore, in this feature section 029SG, even if the reach performance C with a lower expectation of a jackpot than the reach performance D is executed during the variable display, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the pre-performance and premonition performance are executed after the reach performance C, so that it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the expectation of a jackpot is low at the time the reach performance C is executed, and thus preventing a decrease in interest in the game during the execution of the reach performance C.

Furthermore, when comparing the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ, in which the variable display result is first announced as reach performance C or reach performance D and then a reach performance G development announcement performance is executed, with the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ, in which a pre-performance, a precursor performance, and a high expectation reach performance development announcement performance are executed in place of reach performance C or reach performance D while these are being executed, as shown in Figure 19-30 (D), when the variable display result is a jackpot, the difference between the determination rate of reach performance C and the determination rate of reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ is 40%, whereas the difference between the determination rate of reach performance C and the determination rate of reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ is set to 60%. Also, as shown in FIG. 19-30 (E), when the variable display result is a miss, the difference between the determination rate of reach performance C and the determination rate of reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ is 40%, whereas the difference between the determination rate of reach performance C and the determination rate of reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ is set to 20%.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable display of the variable pattern of the super reach θ and the variable display of the variable pattern of the super reach κ can be inferred, depending on whether reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, as to whether the variable display is a variable display of the super reach κ in which a pre-performance, a precursor performance, and a high expectation reach performance notification performance are executed while reach performance C or reach performance D is being executed, or a variable display of the super reach θ in which a reach performance G development notification performance is executed after the variable display result (miss) is once notified as reach performance C or reach performance D, so that the player can pay attention to whether reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, which can increase the interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 19-22, in step 029SGS289, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a chance-up presentation determination process to determine whether or not to execute a chance-up presentation that indicates an increase in the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (the expected probability of a jackpot) during the variable display, and to determine the presentation pattern of the chance-up presentation (step 029SGS289).

After executing the chance-up effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 then starts the process timer corresponding to the process timer selected in the processing of step 029SGS283 or step 029SGS288 (step 029SGS290).

In each process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 213 SGS288). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R (step 029 SGS290).

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 029SGS292). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 029SGS293). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display in progress performance process (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 213SGS291).

In addition, during the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer by 1 each time the variable display performance process is executed, and determines whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to that process timer, and if the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched, the next process timer is started, and the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data. In this way, the variable display of the decorative pattern in this feature part 029SG is executed.

Figure 19-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S029SGS277 of Figure 19-22 as the meter performance determination processing. In the meter performance determination processing shown in Figure 19-23, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the change pattern of the variable display is any one of the change patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, or Super Reach κ (step 029SGS301). If the variable display fluctuation pattern is any one of the fluctuation patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ (step 029 SGS301; Y), the meter performance determination process is terminated, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any one of the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, shortened non-reach, normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029 SGS301; N), it is determined whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS302).

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS302; Y), the meter performance determination process is terminated, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of the non-reach, normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ fluctuation patterns (step 029 SGS302; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a meter performance and the performance pattern according to the fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS303).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 19-24 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach (non-reach without shortening) fluctuation pattern, the meter performance is not executed at a rate of 90%, the meter performance pattern A is executed at a rate of 10%, the meter performance pattern B is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern C is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern D is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern E is executed at a rate of 0%, and the meter performance pattern F is executed at a rate of 0%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern, the meter performance is not executed at a rate of 20%, the meter performance pattern A is executed at a rate of 25%, the meter performance pattern B is executed at a rate of 50%, the meter performance pattern C is executed at a rate of 5%, the meter performance pattern D is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern E is executed at a rate of 0%, and the meter performance pattern F is executed at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is any of the Super Reach α, Super Reach β, Super Reach δ, and Super Reach ζ fluctuation patterns, the meter performance is not executed at a rate of 10%, meter performance pattern A is executed at a rate of 5%, meter performance pattern B is executed at a rate of 15%, meter performance pattern C is executed at a rate of 40%, meter performance pattern D is executed at a rate of 30%, meter performance pattern E is executed at a rate of 0%, and meter performance pattern F is executed at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is that of super reach η, the meter performance is not executed at a rate of 5%, the meter performance pattern A is executed at a rate of 5%, the meter performance pattern B is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern C is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern D is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern E is executed at a rate of 95%, and the meter performance pattern F is executed at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern, the meter performance is not executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern A is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern B is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern C is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern D is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern E is executed at a rate of 0%, and the meter performance pattern F is executed at a rate of 100%.

As shown in Figures 19-24(B) and 19-25, pattern A in the meter performance is a performance pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (the period from the start of the variable display to the announcement of the variable display result in the case of a non-reach fluctuation pattern without shortening), pattern B is a performance pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing and at the second timing after the first timing during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (the period from the start of the variable display to the announcement of the variable display result in the case of a non-reach fluctuation pattern without shortening) (a total of two steps increase), and pattern C is a performance pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing, the second timing, and at the third timing during the period from the reach to the start of the reach performance of the super reach (the period from the reach to the announcement of the variable display result in the case of a normal reach fluctuation pattern).

Pattern D is a presentation pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first timing, the second timing, the third timing, and the fourth timing when reach performance A or reach performance B is being executed (a total of four steps).Pattern E is a presentation pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first timing, the second timing, the third timing, the fourth timing, and the fifth timing after the fourth timing when reach performance A is being executed (a timing before the start of the high expectation reach performance start/stop notification performance).Pattern F is a presentation pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by five steps at the second timing.

Returning to FIG. 19-23, after executing the process of 029SGS303, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has decided to execute a meter performance (step 029SGS304). If it has not decided to execute a meter performance (step 029SGS304; N), the meter performance decision process ends. If it has decided to execute a meter performance (step 029SGS304; Y), the decided performance pattern of the meter performance is stored (step 029SGS305), a meter performance start waiting timer corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is set, and the meter performance decision process ends (step 029SGS306).

When it has been decided that a meter performance will be performed, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the meter performance start waiting timer by 1 each time it executes the performance process during variable display, and determines whether the value of the meter performance start waiting timer has timed out. If the meter performance start waiting timer has timed out, it selects a meter performance process table corresponding to the performance pattern of the determined meter performance, and starts the meter performance process timer. Thereafter, it decrements the value of the meter performance process timer by 1 each time it executes the performance process during variable display, and determines whether the meter performance process timer has timed out. If the meter performance process timer has not timed out, it executes control of the performance device according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the meter performance process timer, and if the meter performance process timer has timed out, it switches the process data and starts the next process data. In this way, it is possible to perform a meter performance during variable display.

As described above, in this feature section 029SG, by executing a meter effect during variable display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the meter 029SG005M increases to five stages, and whether or not a high expectation reach effect development effect is executed as a result of the meter 029SG005M increasing to five stages.

Figure 19-26 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS282 of Figure 19-22 as the reach performance E development suggestion performance decision process. In the reach performance E development suggestion performance decision process shown in Figure 19-26, the performance control CPU 120 first decides whether or not to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance according to the change pattern of the variable display (step 029SGS311). For example, as shown in Figure 19-26 (B), if the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach δ, it decides not to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance 50% of the time, and decides to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance 50% of the time. On the other hand, if the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach ζ, it decides not to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance 20% of the time, and decides to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance 80% of the time.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided in the processing of step 029SGS311 that the reach performance E development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS312). If it has not been decided that the reach performance E development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS312; N), the reach performance E development suggestion performance decision processing is terminated, and if it has been decided that the reach performance E development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS312; Y), the reach performance E development suggestion performance start waiting timer is set and the reach performance E development suggestion performance decision processing is terminated (step 029SGS313).

When it has been decided that the reach performance E development suggestion performance will be executed, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the reach performance E development suggestion performance start waiting timer by 1 each time the performance processing during variable display is executed, and determines whether the value of the reach performance E development suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out. At this time, if the reach performance E development suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out, a process table for the reach performance E development suggestion performance is selected, and the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer is started. After that, the value of the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer is decremented by 1 each time the performance processing during variable display is executed, and it is determined whether the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer has timed out. If the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer has not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer, and if the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer has timed out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. In this way, the reach performance E development suggestion performance can be executed during variable display.

In particular, in this feature part 029SG, the reach performance E development suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate in the variable display in the Super Reach ζ variation pattern in which the reach performance E development notification effect is executed than in the variable display in the Super Reach δ variation pattern in which the reach performance E development notification effect is not executed. Therefore, in the variable display in these Super Reach δ and Super Reach ζ variation patterns, the player is drawn to whether or not the reach performance E development suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the reach performance B, which increases the interest in the game.

Figure 19-27 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS284 of Figure 19-22 as the branch destination suggestion effect determination process. In the branch destination suggestion effect determination process shown in Figure 19-27, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (step 029SGS321).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-28(A), when the variable display fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach γ, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 90% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern X in 10% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Y in 0% of the time, and the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Z in 0% of the time. Also, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach ε, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 70% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern X in 30% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Y in 0% of the time, and the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Z in 0% of the time.

In addition, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach θ, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined not to be executed at a rate of 50%, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern X at a rate of 30%, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Y at a rate of 15%, and the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Z at a rate of 5%. In addition, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach ι, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined not to be executed at a rate of 10%, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern X at a rate of 10%, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Y at a rate of 70%, and the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Z at a rate of 10%. Furthermore, if the variation pattern of the variable display is that of a super reach κ, the branch destination suggestion effect is not executed at a rate of 10%, the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern X at a rate of 30%, the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Y at a rate of 20%, and the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Z at a rate of 40%.

As shown in FIG. 19-28 (B), pattern X of the branch destination suggestion effect is a presentation pattern in which the image display device 5 displays a branch destination suggestion image X suggesting the execution of both a reach performance H development notification effect and a high expectation reach performance development notification effect during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D, pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion effect is a presentation pattern in which the image display device 5 displays a branch destination suggestion image Y suggesting the execution of a reach performance H development notification effect during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D, and pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is a presentation pattern in which the image display device 5 displays a branch destination suggestion image Z suggesting the execution of a high expectation reach performance development notification effect during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D.

In this characteristic part 029SG, among patterns X to Z, pattern Z is determined to be executed at a higher rate than patterns X and Y when a high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed. In other words, pattern Z is a performance pattern with a higher expectation of execution of a high expectation reach performance development notification performance than patterns X and Y (execution expectation of high expectation reach performance development notification performance: pattern Z > pattern Y, pattern Z > pattern X). In addition, pattern Y is determined to be executed at a higher rate than patterns X and X when a reach performance H development notification performance is executed. In other words, pattern Y is a performance pattern with a higher expectation of execution of a reach performance H development notification performance than patterns X and Z (execution expectation of reach performance H development notification performance: pattern Y > pattern Z, pattern Y > pattern X).

As shown in FIG. 19-28(A), the decision ratio of whether or not a branch destination suggestion effect will be executed and the presentation pattern differs depending on the fluctuation pattern of the variable display, not depending on the variable display result. In other words, the decision ratio of whether or not a branch destination suggestion effect will be executed and the presentation pattern is determined depending on whether or not it develops into any of reach presentations G to I after reach presentation C or reach presentation D is executed, and which of reach presentations G to I it develops into, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decision ratio of whether or not a branch destination suggestion effect will be executed and the presentation pattern may differ depending on both the fluctuation pattern of the variable display and the variable display result, or may differ only depending on the variable display result.

Returning to FIG. 19-27, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided in the processing of step 029SGS321 that a branch destination suggestion presentation should be executed (step 029SGS232). If it has not been decided that a branch destination suggestion presentation should be executed (step 029SGS232; N), the branch destination suggestion presentation determination processing is terminated. If it has been decided that a branch destination suggestion presentation should be executed (step 029SGS232; Y), the presentation pattern of the decided branch destination suggestion presentation is stored (step 029SGS323), a timer for waiting for the start of the branch destination suggestion presentation is set, and the branch destination suggestion presentation determination processing is terminated (step 029SGS324).

When it has been decided that a branch destination suggestion performance will be performed, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the branch destination suggestion performance start waiting timer by 1 each time the performance process during variable display is performed, and determines whether the value of the branch destination suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out. If the branch destination suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out, a branch destination suggestion performance process table corresponding to the determined performance pattern of the branch destination suggestion performance is selected, and the branch destination suggestion performance process timer is started. Thereafter, the value of the branch destination suggestion performance process timer is decremented by 1 each time the performance process during variable display is performed, and it is determined whether the branch destination suggestion performance process timer has timed out. If the branch destination suggestion performance process timer has not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the branch destination suggestion performance process timer, and if the branch destination suggestion performance process timer has timed out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. In this way, a branch destination suggestion performance can be performed during variable display.

In particular, in this feature part 029SG, by displaying any one of the branch destination suggestion image X, branch destination suggestion image Y, and branch destination suggestion image Z on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the reach performance C or reach performance D, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is not notified as the reach performance C or reach performance D and the game switches to the pre-performance. Furthermore, depending on whether the branch destination suggestion image X, branch destination suggestion image Y, or branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the reach performance C or reach performance D, the rate at which the reach performance H development notification performance is executed after the pre-performance and the precursor performance and the rate at which the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed differ, so that the player can also pay attention to whether the branch destination suggestion image X, branch destination suggestion image Y, or branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed on the image display device 5, which increases the interest in the game.

Figure 19-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS286 of Figure 19-22 as the reach performance G development suggestion performance determination process. In the reach performance G development suggestion performance determination process shown in Figure 19-29, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the reach performance G development suggestion performance according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-29(B), when the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach ε, the reach performance G development suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 50% of the time, and the reach performance G development suggestion effect is determined to be executed 50% of the time. Also, when the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach θ, the reach performance G development suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 20% of the time, and the reach performance G development suggestion effect is determined to be executed 80% of the time.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided in the processing of step 029SGS331 that the reach performance G development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS332). If it has not been decided that the reach performance G development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS332; N), the reach performance G development suggestion performance decision processing is terminated, and if it has been decided that the reach performance G development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS332; Y), the reach performance G development suggestion performance start waiting timer is set and the reach performance G development suggestion performance decision processing is terminated (step 029SGS333).

When it has been decided that the reach performance G development suggestion performance will be executed, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the reach performance G development suggestion performance start waiting timer by 1 each time the performance processing during the variable display is executed, and determines whether the value of the reach performance G development suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out. At this time, if the reach performance G development suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out, the CPU 120 selects a process table for the reach performance G development suggestion performance and starts the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer. After that, the CPU 120 decrements the value of the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer by 1 each time the performance processing during the variable display is executed, and determines whether the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer has timed out. If the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer has not timed out, the CPU 120 executes control of the performance device according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer, and if the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer has timed out, the CPU 120 switches the process data and starts the next process data. In this way, the reach performance G development suggestion performance can be executed during the variable display.

In particular, in this feature part 029SG, the reach performance E development suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate in the variable display in the super reach θ variation pattern in which the reach performance G notification effect is executed than in the variable display in the super reach ε variation pattern in which the reach performance G development notification effect is not executed. Therefore, in the variable display in these super reach ε and super reach θ variation patterns, the player is drawn to the fact that whether or not the reach performance G development suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the reach performance C or reach performance D is made possible, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Figure 19-31 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS289 of Figure 19-22 as the chance-up effect determination process. In the chance-up effect determination process shown in Figure 19-31, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS340). If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS340; Y), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern, it further determines whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is a super reach λ fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS341).

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS341; Y), the chance-up performance determination process is terminated, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is not the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS341; N), it is further determined whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is the Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, or Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS342).

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is any one of the Super Reach α, Super Reach β, Super Reach δ, Super Reach ζ, Super Reach η, and Super Reach λ fluctuation patterns (step 029SGS342; N), it is further determined whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is a Super Reach α or a Super Reach η fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS343). If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a Super Reach α or a Super Reach η fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS343; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a chance-up performance during the execution of reach performance A and the performance pattern according to the variable display result (step 029SGS344).

Here, the contents of reach performance A to reach performance I in this characteristic part 029SG will be explained based on Fig. 19-32(A) to Fig. 19-32(E). As shown in Fig. 19-32(A) to Fig. 19-32(I), reach performance A to reach performance I are each composed of a reach title display period in which the title of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5, followed by a battle performance execution period in which a battle performance between an ally character and an enemy character is displayed on the image display device 5.

During the reach title display period of each of these reach effects A to I, the reach title can be displayed in red as part of the chance-up effect (see Figure 19-33 (A)).

In addition, for the battle performance execution period of reach performance A to reach performance D, a movable body operation possible period in which the movable body 32 can be operated and a cut-in image display possible period in which a cut-in image can be displayed on the image display device 5 are provided in the first half of the battle performance execution period, and it is possible to execute the operation of the movable body 32 in the movable body operation possible period and the display of a cut-in image in the cut-in image display possible period as part of the chance-up performance (see FIG. 19-33 (A)).

In addition, for the battle performance periods of reach performance C and reach performance D, a period in which the branch destination suggestion performance can be executed is provided after the period in which the movable object can be operated and the period in which the cut-in image can be displayed.

In addition, with regard to the battle execution period of reach performance E and reach performance F, a movable body operation period is provided in the first half of the battle performance execution period, and an operation promotion image display period is provided in the second half of the battle performance execution period (near the end timing of the battle performance) during which an operation promotion image is displayed to encourage the player to operate the push button 31B or stick controller 31A in order to notify the player of the variable display result in response to the operation of the push button 31B or stick controller 31A on the image display device 5. Note that the operation promotion image display period is usually the period during which the image of the push button 31B is displayed.

In this feature part 029SG, during the battle execution period of reach performance E and reach performance F, it is possible to execute the movement of the movable body during the movable body operable period and to display an image of the stick controller 31A during the operation prompting image display period as part of the chance-up performance (see FIG. 19-33 (B)).

Note that there is no movable object operable period, no cut-in image display period, and no operation prompting image display period for reach performance G, reach performance H, and reach performance I. In other words, reach performance G, reach performance H, and reach performance I are reach performances in which the chance-up performance is never executed.

Returning to step 029SGS344 in FIG. 19-31, as shown in FIG. 19-34(A), if the variable display result is a miss, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the chance up effect with a probability of 60%, to execute the chance up effect with pattern P with a probability of 35%, to execute the chance up effect with pattern Q with a probability of 5%, and to execute the chance up effect with pattern R with a probability of 0%. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the effect determines not to execute the chance up effect with pattern P with a probability of 35%, to execute the chance up effect with pattern Q with a probability of 60%, and to execute the chance up effect with pattern R with a probability of 0%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect A is being executed (step 029SGS345). If it has not been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect A is being executed (step 029SGS345; N), it proceeds to step 029SGS347. If it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect A is being executed (step 029SGS345; Y), it stores the decided effect pattern and sets a chance-up effect start timer for reach effect A according to the fluctuation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS347 (step 029SGS346).

In step 029SGS347, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach η (step 029SGS347). If the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach α (step 029SGS347; N), the chance up performance determination process is terminated, and if the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach η (step 029SGS347; Y), the presence or absence of chance up performance during the execution of reach performance F and the performance pattern are determined according to the variable display result (step 029SGS348).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-34(B), if the variable display result is a miss, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 40% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern S 30% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern T 20% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern U 10% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 10% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern S 20% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern T 30% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern U 40% of the time.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect F is being executed (step 029SGS349). If it has not been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect F is being executed (step 029SGS349; N), the chance-up effect decision process is terminated. If it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect F is being executed (step 029SGS349; Y), the decided effect pattern is stored, and a chance-up effect start timer for reach effect F is set according to the fluctuation pattern, and the chance-up effect decision process is terminated (step 029SGS350).

In addition, if the change pattern of the variable display in step 029SGS343 is any of Super Reach β, Super Reach δ, and Super Reach ζ (step 029SGS343; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a chance-up performance during the execution of reach performance B and the performance pattern according to the variable display result (step 029SGS351).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-34(C), if the variable display result is a miss, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 40% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P in 30% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q in 20% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R in 10% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 10% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P in 20% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q in 30% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R in 40% of the time.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect during the execution of reach effect B (step 029SGS352). If it has not been decided to execute a chance-up effect during the execution of reach effect B (step 029SGS352; N), it proceeds to step 029SGS354. If it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect during the execution of reach effect B (step 029SGS352; Y), it stores the decided effect pattern and sets a chance-up effect start timer for reach effect B according to the variation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS354 (step 029SGS353).

In step 029SGS354, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach ζ (step 029SGS354). If the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach β or Super Reach δ (step 029SGS354; N), the chance up performance determination process is terminated, and if the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach ζ (step 029SGS354; Y), the presence or absence of chance up performance during the execution of Reach performance E and the performance pattern are determined according to the variable display result (step 029SGS355).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-34(D), if the variable display result is a miss, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 60% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern S 35% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern T 5% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern U 0% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 5% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern S 35% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern T 60% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern U 0% of the time.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while the reach effect E is being executed (step 029SGS356). If it has not been decided to execute a chance-up effect while the reach effect E is being executed (step 029SGS356; N), the chance-up effect decision process is terminated. If it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while the reach effect E is being executed (step 029SGS356; Y), the decided effect pattern is stored, and a chance-up effect start timer for the reach effect E is set according to the fluctuation pattern, and the chance-up effect decision process is terminated (step 029SGS357).

In addition, if the variable display change pattern in the processing of step 029SGS342 is one of the Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ change patterns (step 029SGS342; Y), the performance control CPU 120 further determines whether the variable display change pattern is one of the Super Reach γ and Super Reach ε change patterns (step 029SGS358).

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is one of the Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, or Super Reach κ fluctuation patterns (step 029 SGS358; N), the chance-up performance determination process is terminated, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is one of the Super Reach γ or Super Reach ε fluctuation patterns (step 029 SGS358; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a chance-up performance during the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D, and the performance pattern, depending on the variable display result (step 029 SGS359).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-34(A), when the reach effect to be executed is reach effect C, if the variable display result is a miss, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 60% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P in 35% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q in 5% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R in 0% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 5% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P in 35% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q in 60% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R in 0% of the time.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19-34(C), when the reach effect to be executed is reach effect D, if the variable display result is a miss, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 40% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P in 30% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q in 20% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R in 10% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 10% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P in 20% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q in 30% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R in 40% of the time.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect C or reach effect D is being executed (step 029SGS360). If it has not decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect C or reach effect D is being executed (step 029SGS360; N), it ends the chance-up effect decision process, and if it has decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect C or reach effect D is being executed (step 029SGS360; Y), it stores the decided effect pattern and sets a chance-up effect start timer for reach effect C or reach effect D according to the fluctuation pattern, and ends the chance-up effect decision process (step 029SGS361).

When it has been decided that a chance-up effect will be executed, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the chance-up effect start waiting timer by 1 each time the effect processing during variable display is executed, and determines whether the chance-up effect start waiting timer has timed out. If the chance-up effect start waiting timer has timed out, a process table for the chance-up effect is selected, and the chance-up effect process timer is started. Thereafter, the value of the chance-up effect process timer is decremented by 1 each time the effect processing during variable display is executed, and a determination is made as to whether the chance-up effect process timer has timed out. If the chance-up effect process timer has not timed out, the effect control device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the chance-up effect process timer, and if the chance-up effect process timer has timed out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. In this way, a chance-up effect can be executed during variable display.

In particular, in this feature section 029SG, the likelihood of a jackpot varies depending on whether or not a chance up effect is executed and the number of times the chance up effect is executed during the execution period of the reach effect, so that the player can pay attention to the number of times the chance up effect is executed and whether or not the chance up effect is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in reach effects such as reach effects A to D, which have a relatively low probability of winning, a maximum of three chance-up effects are executed, so that during the execution of reach effects A to D, the player can be effectively suggested that the variable display result will be a jackpot depending on the number of chance-up effects executed.

On the other hand, in reach effects with a high probability of winning, such as reach effects G to I, the chance-up effect can only be executed once during the reach effect, so that the interest in the reach effect with a high probability of winning is prevented from decreasing by executing the chance-up effect multiple times unnecessarily.

As shown in FIG. 19-34 (E), among the presentation patterns of the chance-up presentations in reach presentations A to D, pattern P is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red but the movable body 32 does not move and the cut-in image is not displayed, pattern Q is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red and the movable body 32 moves but the cut-in image is not displayed, and pattern R is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red, the movable body 32 moves, and the cut-in image is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 19-34 (F), among the presentation patterns of the chance-up presentation in reach presentation E and reach presentation F, pattern S is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red but the movable body 32 is not moved and the image of the stick controller 31A is not displayed, pattern Q is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red and the movable body 32 is moved but the image of the stick controller 31A is not displayed, and pattern R is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red, the movable body 32 is moved, and the image of the stick controller 31A is displayed.

As described above, as shown in Fig. 19-34(A) to Fig. 19-34(D), in the chance up performance of this feature part 029SG, when the chance up performance is not executed, the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest for the chance up performances in reach performance A to reach performance D as a whole, and when the chance up performance is executed in pattern P, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than when the chance up performance is not executed. When the chance up performance is executed in pattern Q, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than when the chance up performance is executed in pattern P. And when the chance up performance is executed in pattern R, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than when the chance up performance is executed in pattern Q (jackpot expectation for chance up performances in reach performance A to reach performance D: pattern R > pattern Q > pattern P > non-execution).

In addition, for the chance up effects in reach effects E and reach effects F as a whole, the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when the chance up effect is not executed, and the jackpot expectation is set to be higher when the chance up effect is executed in pattern S than when the chance up effect is not executed. When the chance up effect is executed in pattern T, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than when the chance up effect is executed in pattern S. And when the chance up effect is executed in pattern RU, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than when the chance up effect is executed in pattern T (jackpot expectation for chance up effects in reach effects E and reach effects F: pattern U > pattern T > pattern S > not executed).

Comparing the cases where reach performance A to reach performance D are executed with the cases where reach performance E or reach performance F is executed, in reach performance A to reach performance D, pattern P and pattern Q are set as commonly executable performance patterns, while pattern R is executable only when reach performance B or reach performance D is executed. In other words, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 are performances that can be executed in any of reach performance A to reach performance D, while the display of the cut-in image 029SG200 is a performance that can be executed only in reach performance B and reach performance D.

Furthermore, comparing the case where reach performance E is executed with the case where reach performance F is executed, in reach performance E and reach performance F, pattern S and pattern T are set as commonly executable performance patterns, while pattern U is executable only when reach performance F is executed. In other words, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 are performances that can be executed in either reach performance E or reach performance F, while the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as an operation prompting image is a performance that can be executed only in reach performance F.

Next, the presentation of the variable display of the Super Reach in this feature part 029SG will be explained based on Fig. 19-35 to Fig. 19-56. First, a case where Reach presentation A is executed as the reach presentation of the Super Reach will be explained. Note that the meter 029SG005M at the start timing of the variable display is displayed as not having increased by even one step. As shown in Fig. 19-35(A) to Fig. 19-35(D), when it is decided to execute the meter presentation at the start of the variable display (this feature part 029SG shows the case where execution of pattern D or pattern E is decided), the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first and second timings before the reach and the third timing after the reach.

As shown in Figures 19-35 (E) and 19-35 (F), when reach performance A starts, the image display device 5 first displays a title image of the reach performance A and an expectation image 029SG251 indicating the expectation of a big win for the reach performance A. At this time, if the execution of a chance up performance has not been decided, a title image 029SG161A with black title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance A, whereas if the execution of a chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern P, Pattern Q, or Pattern R, a title image 029SG161B with red title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance A.

When the display of the title image of reach effect A ends, a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A begins, as shown in FIG. 19-35 (G). Note that, even during the battle effect, the meter 029SG005M increases by another step at the fourth timing, as shown in FIG. 19-36 (H).

In addition, during the battle performance, if it is decided to execute a chance-up performance in the performance pattern of pattern Q or pattern R, the movement of the movable body 32 from the origin position toward the performance position is executed as shown in FIG. 19-36 (I). Note that the movement of the movable body 32 as a chance-up performance is a movement from the origin position toward the performance position, but the movement of the movable body 32 ends at a position intermediate between the origin position and the performance position. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Furthermore, if it has been decided that a chance-up effect will be executed in the effect pattern of pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 will be displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in Figures 19-36 (J) and 19-36 (K).

When the variable display is the variable display of the Super Reach α Miss Variable Pattern (PA2-2), as shown in FIG. 19-36 (L) and FIG. 19-36 (M), the result of the battle performance is that friendly character A is defeated by enemy character A, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle performance (reach performance A) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the Super Reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), as shown in Figures 19-36 (N) and 19-36 (O), the result of the battle performance is that friendly character A defeats enemy character A, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle performance (reach performance A) ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

When the variable display is a Super Reach η variable display, as shown in FIG. 19-37(P) and FIG. 19-37(Q), at the fifth timing after the end of the cut-in image display period, the meter 029SG005M increases by another step (up to 5 steps) and becomes full. Then, at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, a caption image 029SG005T is displayed to inform the user that the meter 029SG005M has increased to 5 steps (become full) and that a high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-37 (R), the battle presentation is interrupted midway, and instead of the battle presentation, the high expectation reach presentation development notification image 029SG180 is displayed on the image display device 5 as a high expectation reach presentation development notification presentation. Then, the reach presentation F is started. Details of the high expectation reach presentation development notification presentation will be described later in FIG. 19-55.

As shown in Figures 19-37 (S) and 19-37 (T), when reach performance F starts, the image display device 5 first displays the title image of the reach performance F and an expectation image 029SG256 indicating the expectation of a big win for the reach performance A. At this time, if the execution of a chance up performance has not been decided, a title image 029SG166A with black title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance F, whereas if the execution of a chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern S, Pattern T, or Pattern U, a title image 029SG166B with red title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance F.

When the display of the title image of reach effect F ends, a battle effect between ally character B and enemy character B begins, as shown in FIG. 19-37 (U). During the battle effect, if the execution of a chance-up effect is determined in the effect pattern of pattern T or pattern U, the movable body 32 moves (moves) from the origin position toward the intermediate position, as shown in FIG. 19-36 (V) and FIG. 19-36 (W). After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

As the battle performance progresses, as shown in Figures 19-38 (X), 19-38 (Y), and 19-38 (Z), an operation prompting image is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up performance has not been determined in the performance pattern of pattern U, an image of the push button 31B is displayed as the operation prompting image, whereas if the execution of the chance-up performance has been determined in the performance pattern of pattern U, an image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as the operation prompting image.

After the operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5, when the player operates an operation means such as the push button 31B or stick controller 31A, or when the operation acceptance period for these operation means ends, the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the battle performance.

Specifically, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is the Super Reach η miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-8), as shown in Figures 19-39(a) and 19-39(b), the result of the battle performance is that ally character B is defeated by enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle performance (reach performance F) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach η jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-6), as shown in Figures 19-39(c) and 19-39(d), the result of the battle presentation is that ally character B wins over enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation F) ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

Next, we will explain the case where reach performance B is executed as the reach performance of the super reach. Note that the meter 029SG005M is displayed as not having increased by even one step at the start timing of the variable display. As shown in Figures 19-40(A) to 19-40(D), when it is decided to execute the meter performance at the start of the variable display (this feature part 029SG discloses the case where execution of pattern D or pattern E is decided), the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first timing, which is the timing before the reach, the second timing, and the third timing after the reach.

As shown in Figures 19-40 (E) and 19-40 (F), when reach performance B starts, the image display device 5 first displays a title image of the reach performance B and an expectation image 029SG252 indicating the expectation of a big win for the reach performance B. At this time, if the execution of a chance up performance has not been decided, a title image 029SG162A with black title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance B, whereas if the execution of a chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern P, Pattern Q, or Pattern R, a title image 029SG162B with red title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance B.

When the display of the title image of reach effect B ends, a battle effect between ally character B and enemy character A begins, as shown in FIG. 19-40 (G). Note that, even during the battle effect, the meter 029SG005M increases by another step at the fourth timing, as shown in FIG. 19-41 (H).

In addition, during the battle presentation, if it is determined that a chance-up presentation is to be performed in the presentation pattern of Pattern Q or Pattern R, the movable body 32 moves (moves) from the origin position to the intermediate position, as shown in FIG. 19-41 (I). After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Furthermore, if it is decided that a chance-up effect will be executed in the effect pattern of pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 19-41(J) and FIG. 19-41(K).

When the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach β miss variable pattern (PA2-3), as shown in Figures 19-41 (L) and 19-41 (M), the result of the battle performance is that ally character B is defeated by enemy character A, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle performance (reach performance B) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), as shown in Figures 19-41 (N) and 19-41 (O), the result of the battle presentation is that friendly character B defeats enemy character A, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation B) ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

In addition, if the variable display is a Super Reach δ or Super Reach ζ variable display, as shown in Figures 19-42 (P) and 19-42 (Q), after the end of the period in which the cut-in image can be displayed, friendly character B is defeated by enemy character A, and the player is notified that the variable display result is a miss.

After the battle performance (reach performance B) ends, a swinging display is performed with a combination that indicates a loss of the decorative symbols. At this time, if it has been decided that a reach performance E development suggestion performance will be performed, a reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 is displayed so that the display position overlaps with the decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 as a reach performance E development suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 19-42 (R).

When the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach δ variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 19-42 (S), after the reach performance E development suggestion performance execution period, the swinging of the decorative pattern stops and it is notified again that the variable display is a miss. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach ζ variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 19-42 (T), after the reach performance E development suggestion performance execution period, a reach performance E development notification image 029SG181 is displayed as a reach performance E development notification performance. Then, the reach performance E starts.

As shown in Figures 19-42 (U) and 19-42 (V), when the reach performance E starts, the image display device 5 first displays the title image of the reach performance E and an expectation image 029SG255 indicating the expectation of a big win for the reach performance E. At this time, if the execution of a chance up performance has not been decided, a title image 029SG165A with black title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance E, whereas if the execution of a chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern S, Pattern T, or Pattern U, a title image 029SG165B with red title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance E.

When the display of the title image of reach effect E ends, a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character B begins, as shown in FIG. 19-42 (W). During the battle effect, if the execution of a chance-up effect is determined in the effect pattern of pattern T or pattern U, the movable body 32 moves (moves) from the origin position toward the intermediate position, as shown in FIG. 19-43 (X) and FIG. 19-43 (Y). After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

As the battle performance progresses, as shown in Figures 19-43(Z), 19-43(a), and 19-43(b), an operation prompting image is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A. Note that at this time, if the execution of the chance-up performance has not been determined in the performance pattern of pattern U, an image of the push button 31B is displayed as the operation prompting image, whereas if the execution of the chance-up performance has been determined in the performance pattern of pattern U, an image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as the operation prompting image.

After the operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5, when the player operates an operation means such as the push button 31B or stick controller 31A, or when the operation acceptance period for these operation means ends, the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the battle performance.

Specifically, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is a Super Reach ζ miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-7), as shown in Figures 19-44(c) and 19-44(d), the result of the battle performance is that friendly character A is defeated by enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle performance (reach performance E) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach ζ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5), as shown in Figures 19-44(e) and 19-44(f), the result of the battle presentation is that friendly character A defeats enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation E) ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

Here, we will explain in more detail the presentation mode of the reach presentation E development suggestion presentation shown in Figure 19-42 (Q) to Figure 19-42 (T).

First, as shown in Fig. 19-45(A) to Fig. 19-45(B), when it has been decided to execute a reach performance E development suggestion effect, in a state where the decorative symbols are displayed oscillatingly in a combination indicating a miss, the first stage of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 as a reach performance E development suggestion effect. Note that the first stage of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 may be an image that is less visible to the player, such as having a lower brightness or fewer display colors than other images displayed in the display area such as decorative symbols.

After the first display period of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 ends, as shown in Fig. 19-45(C) to Fig. 19-45(D), the display of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 ends once, and then the second stage of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 is displayed again so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. Note that the second stage of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 may be an image that is more visible to the player than the first stage of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170, such as being brighter or having more display colors than the first stage of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170.

When the variable display is a variable display based on the Super Reach δ variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 19-45(E), the display of the Reach performance E development notification image 029SG181 on the image display device 5 is not executed as the Reach performance E development notification performance, and the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination indicating a miss. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display based on the Super Reach ζ variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 19-45(F), the Reach performance E development notification image 029SG181 is displayed on the image display device 5 as the Reach performance E development notification performance, and the Reach performance E is executed.

Next, we will explain the case where reach performance C or reach performance D is executed as the reach performance of the super reach. Note that when reach performance C or reach performance D is executed as the reach performance of the super reach, the meter performance is not executed, so the explanation of the period from the start of the variable display to the reach will be omitted.

When reach performance C is executed, as shown in Fig. 19-46(A) to Fig. 19-46(C), when reach performance C starts, the title image of the reach performance C and the expectation image 029SG253 showing the expectation of a big win of the reach performance C are displayed on the image display device 5 first. At this time, if the execution of the chance up performance has not been decided, the title image 029SG163A with the title letters in black is displayed as the title image of the reach performance C, while if the execution of the chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern P, Pattern Q, or Pattern R, the title image 029SG163B with the title letters in red is displayed as the title image of the reach performance C.

Then, when the display of the title image of reach effect C ends, a battle effect between ally character C and enemy character A begins, as shown in FIG. 19-46 (C).

On the other hand, when reach performance D is executed, as shown in Fig. 19-46(D) to Fig. 19-46(F), when reach performance D is started, the title image of the reach performance D and the expectation image 029SG254 showing the expectation of a big win of the reach performance D are displayed on the image display device 5 first. At this time, if the execution of the chance up performance has not been decided, the title image 029SG164A with the title letters in black is displayed as the title image of the reach performance D, while if the execution of the chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern P, Pattern Q, or Pattern R, the title image 029SG164B with the title letters in red is displayed as the title image of the reach performance D.

Then, when the display of the title image of reach effect D ends, a battle effect between ally character D and enemy character A begins, as shown in FIG. 19-46 (F).

In addition, during the battle effects of reach effects C or reach effects D, if it is determined that a chance-up effect is to be executed in the effect pattern of pattern Q or pattern R, the movable body 32 moves (moves) from the origin position to the intermediate position, as shown in Figures 19-47(G) and 19-47(H). After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Furthermore, if it has been decided that a chance-up effect will be executed in the effect pattern of pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 will be displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in Figures 19-47 (I) and 19-47 (J).

Also, as shown in Figures 19-47 (K) to 19-47 (M), if it has been decided that a branch destination suggestion effect will be executed, after the period during which a cut-in image can be displayed during the battle effect of reach effect C or reach effect D, the image display device 5 displays, as a branch destination suggestion effect, one of the following images: a branch destination suggestion image X (branch destination suggestion image 029SG005X) suggesting that both a reach effect H development notification effect (reach effect H) and a high expectation reach effect development notification effect (reach effect I) will be executed; a branch destination suggestion image Y (branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Y) suggesting that a reach effect H development notification effect (reach effect H) will be executed; or a branch destination suggestion image Z (branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Z) suggesting that a high expectation reach effect development notification effect (reach effect I) will be executed.

After the period when the branch destination suggestion effect can be executed, if the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach γ miss variation pattern (PA2-4), as shown in Figures 19-48 (N) to 19-48 (P), if reach effect C is being executed, the result of the battle effect is that ally character C is defeated by enemy character A, thereby informing the player that the variable display is a miss, and if reach effect D is being executed, the result of the battle effect is that ally character D is defeated by enemy character A, thereby informing the player that the variable display is a miss. Then, after the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display in the Super Reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-4), as shown in Figures 19-48 (Q) to 19-48 (S), when reach performance C is being executed, the variable display notifies the player that it is a jackpot as a result of the battle performance that ally character C wins over enemy character A, and when reach performance D is being executed, the variable display notifies the player that it is a jackpot as a result of the battle performance that ally character D wins over enemy character A. Then, after the battle performance (reach performance C or reach performance D) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed stopped in a combination indicating a miss.

In addition, if the variable display is a Super Reach ε or Super Reach θ variable display, as shown in Figure 19-49 (T) to Figure 19-49 (V), after the end of the period in which the branch destination suggestion performance can be executed, friendly character C or friendly character D is defeated by enemy character A, and the user is notified that the variable display result is a miss.

After the battle performance (reach performance C or reach performance D) ends, a swinging display is performed with a combination that indicates a loss of the decorative symbols. At this time, if it has been decided that a reach performance G development suggestion performance will be executed, a reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 is displayed so that the display position of the decorative symbols overlaps in the display area of the image display device 5 as a reach performance G development suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 19-49 (W).

When the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach ε variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 19-49 (X), after the reach performance G development suggestion performance execution period, the swinging of the decorative pattern stops and it is notified again that the variable display is a miss. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach θ variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 19-49 (Y), after the reach performance G development suggestion performance execution period, the reach performance G development notification image 029SG182 is displayed as a reach performance G development notification performance. Then, the reach performance G starts.

As shown in FIG. 19-50 (Z), when a reach performance G starts, the image display device 5 first displays the title image 029SG167 of the reach performance G and an expectation image 029SG257 indicating the expectation of a big win for the reach performance G.

When the display of the title image 029SG167 of the reach effect G ends, as shown in Fig. 19-50(a) and Fig. 19-50(b), a battle effect between ally character C and enemy character B begins. If the variable display fluctuation pattern is the super reach θ miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-9), as shown in Fig. 19-50(c) and Fig. 19-50(d), the result of the battle effect is that ally character C is defeated by enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle effect (reach effect G) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination indicating a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach θ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-7), as shown in Figures 19-50 (e) and 19-50 (f), the result of the battle presentation is that friendly character C defeats enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation G) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

Here, we will explain in more detail the presentation mode of the reach presentation G development suggestion presentation shown in Figure 19-49 (V) to Figure 19-49 (Y).

First, as shown in Fig. 19-54(A) to Fig. 19-54(B), when it has been decided to execute a reach performance G development suggestion effect, in a state where the decorative symbols are displayed oscillatingly in a combination indicating a miss, the first stage of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 as a reach performance G development suggestion effect. Note that the first stage of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 may be an image that is less visible to the player, such as having a lower brightness or fewer display colors than other images displayed in the display area such as decorative symbols.

After the first display period of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 ends, as shown in Fig. 19-54(C) to Fig. 19-54(D), the display of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 ends once, and then the second display of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 is performed again so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. Note that the second-stage reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 may be an image that is more visible to the player than the first-stage reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171, such as being brighter or having more display colors than the first-stage reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171.

When the variable display is a variable display based on the Super Reach ε variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 19-45(E), the display of the reach performance G development notification image 029SG182 on the image display device 5 is not executed as the reach performance G development notification performance, and the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination indicating a miss. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display based on the Super Reach θ variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 19-54(F), the display of the reach performance G development notification image 029SG182 on the image display device 5 is executed as the reach performance G development notification performance.

In addition, if the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach ι variable pattern or a Super Reach κ variable pattern, as shown in Figures 19-51 (g) to 19-51 (h), after the branch destination suggestion effect can be executed during the execution of Reach effect C or Reach effect D, a shutter image 029SG006 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a pre-effect (the shutter image 029SG006 is moved from the left and right of the display area toward the center of the display area), and the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 becomes temporarily invisible due to the shutter image 029SG006.

When the execution period of the pre-effect ends due to the passage of a predetermined period of time, the shutter image 029SG006 retreats from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to the left and right as a premonition effect, and the image of character C becomes visible to the player in the display area of the image display device 5 in response to the retreat of the shutter image 029SG006.

When the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach ι variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 19-51(i), a reach performance H development notification image 029SG183 is displayed on the image display device 5 as a reach performance H development notification performance, and then a reach performance H is executed. When the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach κ variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 19-51(j), a high expectation reach performance development notification image 029SG180 is displayed on the image display device 5 as a high expectation reach performance development notification performance, and then a reach performance I is executed. Details of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be described later in FIG. 19-55.

When the variable display fluctuation pattern is a variable display with a Super Reach ι fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIG. 19-52 (k), when the reach performance H starts, the image display device 5 first displays the title image 029SG168 of the reach performance H and the expectation image 029SG258 indicating the expectation of a jackpot for the reach performance H.

When the display of the title image 029SG168 of the reach effect H ends, as shown in FIG. 19-52(l) and FIG. 19-52(m), a battle effect between ally character D and enemy character C begins. If the variable display change pattern is a super reach i miss change pattern (PA2-10), as shown in FIG. 19-52(n) and FIG. 19-52(o), the result of the battle effect is that ally character D is defeated by enemy character C, and the variable display result is notified that it is a miss, and after the battle effect (reach effect H) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination indicating a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach ι jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-8), as shown in Figure 19-52 (p) and Figure 19-52 (q), the result of the battle presentation is that friendly character D defeats enemy character C, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation H) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

In addition, when the variable display variation pattern is a variable display in the Super Reach κ variation pattern, as shown in Fig. 19-53(r) to Fig. 19-53(s), when the high expectation reach performance development notification performance starts, the image display device 5 first displays the title image 029SG169 of the reach performance I and the expectation image 029SG259 showing the jackpot expectation of the reach performance I. At this time, the image display device 5 displays images of Characters A to C behind the title image 029SG169 and expectation image 029SG259 of the reach performance I, thereby creating a sense of exclusivity due to the fact that the reach performance I has a higher jackpot expectation than other Super Reach reach performances.

When the display of the title image 029SG169 of reach performance I ends, as shown in FIG. 19-53(t) and FIG. 19-53(u), a battle performance begins between ally character A to ally character D and enemy character C. Note that if the variable display fluctuation pattern is the Super Reach κ miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-11), as shown in FIG. 19-53(v) and FIG. 19-53(w), the result of the battle performance is that ally character A to ally character D are defeated by enemy character C, and it is announced that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle performance (reach performance H) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination indicating a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the Super Reach κ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-9), as shown in Figure 19-53 (x) and Figure 19-53 (y), the result of the battle presentation is that friendly characters A to D defeat enemy character C, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation H) ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

Here, we will explain in more detail the high expectation reach performance development notification effects shown in Figures 19-37 (R) to 19-37 (T) and 19-53 (r) to 19-53 (s).

First, as shown in Figures 19-55(A) to 19-55(B), when the high expectation reach performance development notification performance starts, a high expectation reach performance development notification image 029SG180 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 to notify that reach performance F or reach performance I will be executed. Furthermore, after the high expectation reach performance development notification image 029SG180 is displayed, a blackout performance is executed in which the display area of the image display device 5 is darkened to make it difficult to see the performance image displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the blackout effect, a darkened image is displayed on the image display device 5, making it difficult to see other effect images (such as the variable display images of decorative patterns and character images), and the brightness of the display screen itself is reduced, while the volume of the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is reduced compared to before the high expectation reach effect development notification effect was executed. Furthermore, the amount of light emitted by the various light-emitting means (e.g., LEDs, etc.) provided in the game area, movable body 32, glass door frame, and game machine frame 3 is reduced compared to before the high expectation reach effect development notification effect was executed, making it even more difficult to see other effect images (such as the variable display images of decorative patterns and character images).

After the blackout effect is executed, an image of character C is displayed as a pre-effect, as shown in FIG. 19-55(C). In the pre-effect, the lines spoken by character C are displayed as text image 029SG007 in the display area of image display device 5, and the lines are output as audio information from speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 19-55(D) and FIG. 19-55(E), a switching performance is executed after the first performance ends, and a second performance is executed after the first performance ends. As the switching performance, an image different from the image of character C displayed in the first performance is displayed. Note that, in this feature section 029SG, an example is shown in which only one image is displayed as the switching performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of a plurality of images may be displayed as the switching performance. Note that, when any one of a plurality of images is displayed as the switching performance in this manner, the proportion controlled to the jackpot game state may be made different depending on which image is displayed.

As mentioned above, in the latter stage performance, the lines spoken by the character are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as character image 029SG008, and the lines are output as audio information from speakers 8L, 8R. The character image 029SG008 displayed at this time has fewer characters than the character image 029SG007 displayed in the former stage performance, but each character is larger and brighter than the character image 029SG007 (see Figure 19-10).

As shown in FIG. 19-55(F), after the end of the latter stage performance, the movable body performance is executed. In this movable body performance, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position, which is located above the image display device 5, to a performance position overlapping with the approximate center position on the front side of the display area of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 that has fallen to the performance position is moved back to the origin position by the drive of a drive motor (not shown) or the like.

After the movable body performance ends, as shown in FIG. 19-55 (G), a reach performance according to each variation pattern (if the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach η variation pattern, then a reach performance F is executed, and if the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach κ variation pattern, then a reach performance I is executed).

Next, the variable display in the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern will be described. As shown in Figures 19-56(A) to 19-56(D), in the variable display in the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern, first, when the variable display starts, the meter 029SG005M increases all at once to the fifth stage and becomes full at the second timing before the reach. Next, a caption image 029SG005T is displayed at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5 to inform the player that the meter 029SG005M has increased to the fifth stage (becomes full) and to inform the player that a high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be executed.

Then, the high expectation reach performance development notification effect is executed without a reach occurring or any of the reach performances A to D being executed. The presentation mode of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect is the same as the presentation mode described above in FIG. 19-55. After the high expectation reach performance development notification effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 19-53, reach performance I is executed and it is finally announced that the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this characteristic part 029SG, as shown in Figures 19-8 and 19-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is set to be longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance, and the length L11 of the period from when the reach performance E development notification performance starts until the reach performance E is executed and the variable display result of the reach performance E is notified that it is a jackpot as a result of the performance is set to be longer than the length L11 of the period from when the high expectation reach performance development notification performance starts until the reach performance F is executed and the Since the length of the period L12 until the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as the result of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is set shorter than the length of the period L13 from the start of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance until the reach performance I is executed and the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as the result of the reach performance I, in the case where the reach performance E is executed after the execution of the reach performance E development suggestion performance, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to an excessively long period until the variable display result is notified as a jackpot. Also, in the case where the reach performance I is executed after the execution of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance, it is possible to appropriately draw the player's attention to the reach performance I until the variable display result is notified as a jackpot, thereby improving interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 19-7, the length L2 of the execution period of reach performance B is set longer than the length L1 of the execution period of r-value performance A, so that the player can focus on reach performance B for a longer period than reach performance A, thereby increasing interest in the game. As shown in FIG. 19-7 to FIG. 19-9, unlike reach performance A, the reach performance B does not execute a development notification performance before the variable display result is notified as a performance result, so that even if the reach performance E development notification performance is not executed, it is possible to reliably draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display result of the reach performance B will be notified that it is a jackpot.

In addition, as shown in Figures 19-7 to 19-9, while reach performance A or reach performance B is being executed, a meter performance may be executed as a performance suggesting the execution of a high expectation reach performance development notification performance, so that the execution of the meter performance can arouse the player's anticipation that a high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be executed.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, an example is given of a form in which a meter effect can be executed as an effect suggesting the execution of a high expectation reach effect development notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the meter effect, the execution of a high expectation reach effect development notification effect may be suggested by the output mode of the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9, etc.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, a form in which the meter performance can be executed only when the reach performance A or the reach performance B is executed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter performance can also be executed when the reach performance C or the reach performance D is executed. In particular, in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ in which the pre-performance and the premonition performance are executed from the middle of the reach performance C or the reach performance D, and then the high expectation reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance I are executed, a case may be provided in which the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage (changes to a display mode that notifies the execution of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance) in response to the pre-performance or the premonition performance. In this way, the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach ι and the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ can draw the player's attention to whether the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage during the execution of the pre-performance or the premonition performance, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 19-9 and 19-25, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage at once at the second timing without going through the execution of reach performance A, and the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed. Therefore, even if reach performance A is not executed, the player can be drawn to the fact that the high expectation reach performance development notification performance and reach performance I are being executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 19-7 to 19-9, this feature section 029SG illustrates an example in which the high expectation reach performance development notification effect and reach performance I are not executed when reach performance B is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be cases in which the high expectation reach performance development notification effect and reach performance I are executed after reach performance B is executed. By doing this, even when reach performance B is executed, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the high expectation reach performance development notification effect and reach performance I are executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, the meter 029SG005M is shown to increase by one step at each of the first to fifth timings as an example of the meter performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter 029SG005M may increase by two or more steps at any timing. Furthermore, when the meter 029SG005M is increased by two or more steps at any of the first to fifth timings in this manner, the rate at which the meter 029SG005M progresses to reach performance I may differ between the case where the meter 029SG005M has increased to the fifth step before the start of reach performance A or reach performance B and the case where the meter 029SG005M has increased to the fifth step after the start of reach performance A or reach performance B. In addition, in this feature 029SG, the meter performance is exemplified as a form in which the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to five stages, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter performance may be such that the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed in four stages or less or six stages or more.

Also, as shown in Figures 19-8 and 19-9, the length of the period L13 from when the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is started until reach performance I is executed and the variable display result is notified of a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance I is set to be longer than the length of the period L12 from when the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is started until reach performance F is executed and the variable display result is notified of a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance F. Therefore, by lengthening the period until the performance result is notified when reach performance I with a higher expectation of a jackpot is executed, the sense of expectation of being controlled in a jackpot game state can be effectively increased.

As shown in Figures 19-23 to 19-25, the meter effect suggesting the execution of a high-expectation reach effect development notification effect in this feature part 029SG is an effect in which the display mode changes in stages over a maximum of five stages (six stages if the state in which the meter effect is not executed is included) from the first timing to the fifth timing of the variable display. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 19-45, the reach effect E development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of reach effect E in this feature part 029SG is an effect in which the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 changes over two stages. In other words, in this feature part 029SG, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can change up to five stages as a meter effect, but the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 can only change up to two stages as a reach effect E development suggestion effect. For this reason, in meter effects, the image of the effect target (meter 029SG005M) is more likely to change to the fifth stage than in reach effect E development suggestion effects, so the player can pay attention to whether the meter 029SG005M will increase to the fifth stage, increasing interest in the game.

In this characteristic part 029SG, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to five stages as a meter performance, while the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 can only be changed up to two stages as a reach performance E development suggestion performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 can be changed up to five stages as a reach performance E development suggestion performance. In this way, when the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 can be changed up to five stages as a reach performance E development suggestion performance, the rate at which the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 changes up to the fifth stage can be set lower than the rate at which the display mode of the meter 029SG005M changes up to the fifth stage.

In addition, as shown in Figures 19-7 to 19-9, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ and Super Reach ζ, the length L5 of the period during which the meter effect can be executed is set longer than the length L6a of the period during which the reach effect E development suggestion effect can be executed, so that it is possible to suggest for a longer period that the reach effect F, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the reach effect A, will be executed after the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed, compared to the reach effect E being executed after the execution of the reach effect E development notification effect is suggested, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, an example is given in which the length L5 of the period in which the meter performance can be executed is set to be longer than the length L6a of the period in which the reach performance E development suggestion performance can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the length L5 of the period in which the meter performance can be executed may be set to be shorter than the length L6a of the period in which the reach performance E development suggestion performance can be executed.

In addition, this characteristic part 029SG illustrates an example of a form in which the meter 029SG005M can be displayed on the image display device 5 even when it is not determined that a meter performance is to be performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 only when it is determined that a meter performance is to be performed. Furthermore, the meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 for the first time at the timing of the first stage increase.

Furthermore, since the reach effect E development suggestion effect is an effect that can be executed after the variable display result (miss) is notified as the result of the reach effect B, by executing the reach effect E development suggestion effect while the reach effect B is being executed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the player realizing that the variable display result is not notified as a jackpot as the result of the reach effect B.

Note that in this feature part 029SG, the only pattern disclosed as a pattern for progressing from reach performance B to reach performance E is a pattern in which a reach performance E development notification performance and a reach performance E are executed after a variable display result is announced as the performance result of reach performance B (see FIG. 1-8 (F)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a pattern for progressing from reach performance B to reach performance E may also be provided in which a reach performance E development notification performance and a reach performance E are executed before a variable display result is announced as the performance result of reach performance B. In this way, when providing a case in which a reach performance E development notification performance and a reach performance E are executed before a variable display result is announced as the performance result of reach performance B, a reach performance E development suggestion performance may be executed while the reach performance B is being executed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 19-31 to 19-34, while reach effects A to F are being executed, chance up effects can be executed, and the probability of winning varies depending on which effect pattern the chance up effect is executed in.

In particular, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach η, in which reach performance F is executed after reach performance A, during the execution of reach performance A, it is possible to execute a total of two performances constituting the chance-up performance, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32, whereas during the execution of reach performance F, it is possible to execute a total of three performances constituting the chance-up performance, the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the image display of the stick controller 31A as an operation prompting image. For this reason, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach η, the number of times the performances constituting the chance-up performance are executed is increased during the execution of reach performance F compared to during the execution of reach performance A, which makes it possible to appropriately draw the player's attention to the performance result of reach performance F.

Furthermore, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, in which reach performance E is executed after the execution of reach performance B, during the execution of reach performance B, it is possible to execute a total of three performances constituting the chance-up performance, including the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, whereas during the execution of reach performance E, it is possible to execute a total of two performances constituting the chance-up performance, including the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32, as a chance-up performance. For this reason, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, the number of times the performances constituting the chance-up performance are executed during the execution of reach performance E is less than during the execution of reach performance B, which prevents the player from paying excessive attention to the performance result of reach performance E, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In this characteristic part 029SG, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, which executes reach performance E after the execution of reach performance B, during the execution of reach performance B, it is possible to execute a total of three performances constituting the chance-up performance, including the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, whereas during the execution of reach performance E, it is possible to execute a total of two performances constituting the chance-up performance, including the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32, as the chance-up performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, which executes reach performance E after the execution of reach performance B, it is also possible to execute the same number of performances constituting the chance-up performance during the execution of reach performance B as during the execution of reach performance E.

In this characteristic section 029SG, examples of the effects constituting the chance-up effect include the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and the display of an image of the stick controller 31A as an operation prompting image, but the present invention is not limited to these. For example, the effects constituting the chance-up effect may include the illumination of the game effect lamp 9 in a specific pattern, the output of a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the illumination of the light guide plate, the display of a light guide plate (pseudo light guide plate) on the image display device 5, the operation of the image display device 5 itself, etc.

In addition, in this characteristic section 029SG, examples of the effects that make up the chance-up effect include the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as an operation prompt image, all of which are effects that are executed regardless of the player's operation (active effects). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effects that make up the chance-up effect may include effects that are executed only when the player operates an operation means such as the push button 31B or stick controller 31A to change the light color of the game effect lamp 9 (the so-called back button) (active effects) that are executed only when the player operates the operation means.

As shown in Fig. 19-7 to Fig. 19-9 and Fig. 19-30, for the variable display of the variation patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ, the reach performance of the Super Reach to be executed can be determined from reach performance C and reach performance D, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than reach performance C. If the pre-performance and the premonition performance are executed and the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed before the variable display result is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, the reach performance I is executed, and if the reach performance G development notification performance is executed after the variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, the reach performance G, which has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the reach performance I, is executed.

Furthermore, before the variable display result is announced as the result of reach performance C or reach performance D, the pre-performance and premonition performances are executed, and when the reach performance H development announcement performance is executed, the reach performance H, which has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the reach performance I, is executed, so that the performances can be diversified by combining the types of reach performances and the development announcement performances.

In particular, for the variable display of the variation patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ, by determining whether to execute reach performance C or reach performance D at the ratios shown in Figures 19-30 (A) and 19-30 (B), the ratio of the reach performance I (high expectation reach performance development notification performance) being executed after the premonition performance is executed is set higher when the execution of reach performance C is decided than when the execution of reach performance D is decided, so that a predetermined relationship can be established between the executed reach performance and the high expectation reach performance development notification performance, thereby increasing the interest in the reach performance and the development notification performance.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, an example has been given of a form in which the reach performance to be executed can be determined from reach performance C and reach performance D in the variable display of the variable patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable pattern in which reach performance C is executed during the variable display and a variable pattern in which reach performance D is executed during the variable display may be provided separately.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 19-34, whether or not a chance-up effect is executed and the effect pattern are determined at different rates depending on the variable display result. In other words, the example shows a form in which the chance-up effect is executed as an effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot as the effect result of the reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. The chance-up effect that can be executed during the effect period of reach effect A to reach effect D may be executed as an effect that suggests that any of reach effect E to reach effect I will be executed (developing into any of reach effect E to reach effect I).

Furthermore, as a chance-up effect, in addition to the variable display result being a jackpot and one of reach effects E to I being executed, it may also be possible to indicate that the number of rounds of the jackpot game when the variable display result is a jackpot will be 10 rounds, that the game will be controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot game ends, etc.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-9, in the case where a high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed after a reach performance C or a reach performance D is executed, and in the case where a reach performance H development notification performance is executed after a reach performance C or a reach performance D is executed, a common pre-performance can be executed in the period between the reach performance C or the reach performance D and the development notification performance. By executing the pre-performance, the player's attention to the development notification performance can be increased, while the player's attention can be drawn to whether the high expectation reach performance development notification performance or the reach performance H development notification performance will be executed as the development notification performance, thereby increasing interest in the game.

As shown in Figures 19-7 to 19-9 and Figures 19-27 to 19-28, during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D, it is possible to execute a branch destination suggestion effect that suggests whether a reach performance H development announcement effect or a high expectation reach performance development announcement effect will be executed after the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D, and that can suggest the execution of both a reach performance H development announcement effect and a high expectation reach performance development announcement effect. Therefore, by executing the development destination suggestion effect, the player's attention can be increased to the execution of the development announcement effect, while the player's attention can be drawn to whether a reach performance H development announcement effect or a high expectation reach performance development announcement effect will be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, an example has been given of a form in which it is possible to suggest that a reach performance H development notification performance will be executed and that a high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be executed as a development suggestion performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to suggest that a reach performance G development notification performance will be executed as a development suggestion performance.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, an example is given of a form in which a development suggestion effect can be executed by a variable display of a variable pattern that executes reach effect C or reach effect C, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a development suggestion effect can also be executed by a variable display of a variable pattern that executes reach effect A or a variable display of a variable pattern that executes reach effect B.

As shown in FIG. 19-30(D), for the variation pattern of Super Reach κ in which a high expectation reach performance development notification effect and a reach performance I are executed before the performance result is notified as a reach performance C or a reach performance D, and the variation pattern of Super Reach θ in which a reach performance G development notification effect and a reach performance G are executed after the performance result is notified as a reach performance C or a reach performance D, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the difference between the rate at which the reach performance C is executed and the rate at which the reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the variable display of the Super Reach κ variation pattern is 6. 0%, whereas the difference between the rate at which reach performance C is executed and the rate at which reach performance D is executed is 40%, so depending on whether reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, it becomes possible to guess whether reach performance I is executed in the variable display of the variable pattern of super reach κ, or whether reach performance H is executed in the variable display of the variable pattern of super reach θ, and therefore it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this characteristic part 029SG, for the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern and the Super Reach θ fluctuation pattern, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the difference between the rate at which reach performance C is executed and the rate at which reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the Super Reach θ fluctuation pattern is set to be smaller than the difference between the rate at which reach performance C is executed and the rate at which reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a miss, the difference between the rate at which reach performance C is executed and the rate at which reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the Super Reach θ fluctuation pattern may be set to be smaller than the difference between the rate at which reach performance C is executed and the rate at which reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, the characteristic part 029SG exemplifies a form in which a first pending memory display area 029SG005D and a second pending memory display area 029SG005U are provided at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, which are capable of displaying a pending memory display, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 029SG-1, as shown in FIG. 19-57, an active display area 029SG005F may be provided at a predetermined position of the display area of the image display device 5 (for example, the center of the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5) in which a pending memory display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed can be displayed as an active display.

In addition, when the active display can be displayed in this manner, multiple display modes of the active display can be provided, as in the above-mentioned look-ahead preview performance, and an active display performance can be executed in which the probability of winning varies depending on which display mode the active display is displayed in. For example, three types of display modes for the active display can be provided: a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle, and the highest probability of winning can be set when the active display is displayed in a red circle display mode, and the lowest probability of winning can be set when the active display is displayed in a white circle display mode (expected probability of winning for display modes of the active display: red > blue > white).

Furthermore, the display mode of the active display may be changed from a white or blue circle to a red circle during variable display, and the change in the display mode of the active display to a red circle may indicate an increase in the likelihood of a jackpot for the variable display being executed.

In this way, when the display mode of the active display can be changed during the variable display, as shown in Figures 19-58 (A) and 19-58 (B), for the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ, in which the variable display result (miss) is once notified as the performance result of reach performance B and then reach performance E is executed, the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance E is set to P1.

In addition, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach η, in which a high expectation reach development notification display is executed during the execution of reach performance A and then reach performance F is executed, the rate at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance A is P2, and the rate at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance F is P3.

In this case, P3, which is the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while reach performance F is being executed, may be set higher than P1, which is the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while reach performance E is being executed, or P2, which is the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while reach performance A is being executed.

In this way, when a variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach η (when reach performance A is executed and then reach performance F is executed), the display mode of the active display changes to a red circle before the start of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance, reducing the risk of the player realizing in advance that reach performance F will be executed. Also, when reach performance E is executed and when reach performance F is executed, the display mode of the active display changes to a red circle at a higher rate in reach performance F, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than reach performance E, so that the display mode of the active display can be changed to a red circle appropriately according to the expectation of a jackpot, improving interest in the game.

In addition, in the modified example 029SG-1, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach η, the rate P3 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach performance F is higher than the rate P2 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach performance A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as modified example 029SG-2, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach η as in the modified example 029SG-1, during the execution of the reach performance F, The rate P3 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance A may be set to be higher than the rate P2 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance A, and the rate P1 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance E in the variable display of the variable pattern of super reach ζ may be set to be higher than the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance B.

In this way, by providing multiple active display modes and varying the likelihood of a jackpot depending on which display mode the active display is displayed in, it is possible to make the player more aware of the likelihood of a jackpot, and by changing the display mode of the active display to a red circle before the reach effect E development notification effect or the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed, it is possible to reduce the risk of a decrease in interest in the game due to the player perceiving in advance that the likelihood of a jackpot is high.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, a variation pattern of the super reach λ is provided in which a high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed and reach performance I is executed without going through reach performances such as reach performance A and reach performance B. As a modified example 029SG-3, in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach λ, the rate P5 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of reach performance I may be set higher than the rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of reach performance I. In this way, by changing the display mode of the active display from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the execution of reach performance I, it is possible to make the player more aware in advance that reach performance I will be executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-3, in the variable display of the Super Reach λ variation pattern, the rate P5 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of the Reach performance I is set to be higher than the rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the Reach performance I is set to be higher than the rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the Reach performance I is set to be lower than the rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the Reach performance I. By doing so, it is possible to create a situation in which the Reach performance I is executed without going through another Reach performance even though the display mode of the active display has not changed to a red circle, which gives the game an element of surprise and increases the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG and the modified examples 029SG-1 to 029SG-3, three types of display modes for the reserved memory display and active display are provided: a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle, and the expected probability of a jackpot is varied depending on which display mode the reserved memory display and active display are displayed in. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of display modes for the reserved memory display and active display may be only two types or four or more types.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned modified examples 029SG-1 to 029SG-3, examples have been given in which the display mode of the active display can be changed while a reach performance is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing of the change in the active display mode may include timing other than while a reach performance is being executed, for example, while a development suggestion performance or development notification performance is being executed, or the start timing of the variable display. Furthermore, if it is possible to execute a pseudo consecutive performance that includes a temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative pattern during the variable display, the display mode of the active display may be changed at the timing of the temporary stop or re-variable display.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, three types of display forms for the reserved memory display are provided: a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle. An example is given of a form in which the expected probability of a jackpot varies depending on which display form the reserved memory display is displayed in. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-4, in addition to a circle, a triangle, a square, a star, etc. may be provided as the display form for the reserved memory table display, and it may be possible to suggest which of the reach effects E, F, G, H, or I the reserved memory display will develop into depending on which shape it is displayed in. In this case, when the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value judgment process and judges that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation category) is a super reach, it further judges which of the Super Reach α to Super Reach λ the Super Reach fluctuation pattern is (which of Reach performance A to Reach performance I will execute during the variable display), and transmits a Super Reach fluctuation category command (a fluctuation category command including information on which Super Reach fluctuation pattern will be executed) according to the judgment to the performance control board 12. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 can determine the display mode of the reserved memory table display from a circle, triangle, square, star, etc. based on the Super Reach fluctuation category command received from the CPU 103. Also, since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the shape of the reserved memory display before the variable display begins, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-4, an example is given in which the shape of the reserved memory display can suggest a reach performance that will develop, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the color of the reserved memory display can suggest the likelihood of a jackpot, and the shape of the reserved memory display can further suggest a reach performance that will develop into a draw. In this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the color and shape of the reserved memory display, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-4, an example is given of a form in which the shape of the pending memory display can suggest a future reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach performances that can suggest a future reach performance based on the shape of the pending memory display may be only some of reach performance E, reach performance F, reach performance G, reach performance H, and reach performance I (for example, only reach performance E and reach performance I).

In addition, in the characteristic section 029SG, as a chance-up effect, the characters of the reach title image can be displayed in red at the start of the reach effects A to F, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 029SG-5, as a chance-up effect, the characters of the reach title image displayed in black can be changed to red halfway through. In particular, when the characters of the reach title image are changed to red halfway through as a chance-up effect in this way, the display mode of the expectation image showing the expectation of a big win displayed together with the reach title image can be changed (for example, the number of stars displayed as the expectation image can be increased). In this way, the display mode of the expectation image changes as the color of the characters of the reach title image changes from black to red, so that attention to the expectation image can be increased, and the player can be made to accurately recognize the expectation of the reach effect to be executed.

In addition, in the feature part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 19-28, for the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach κ, an example is given in which the presence or absence of a branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect can be determined at the same rate when the reach presentation of the super reach to be executed is reach presentation C and when it is reach presentation D, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach κ, the presence or absence of a branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect can be determined at different rates when the reach presentation of the super reach to be executed is reach presentation C and when it is reach presentation D.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 19-59 as modified example 029SG-6, in the variable display of the variable pattern of super reach κ in which a high expectation reach performance is executed before the variable display result is announced as reach performance C or reach performance D during execution of the reach performance C or reach performance D, if the reach performance to be executed is determined to be reach performance C, a decision is made to not execute the branch destination suggestion performance 15% of the time, to execute the branch destination suggestion performance using pattern X 30% of the time, to execute the branch destination suggestion performance using pattern Y 20% of the time, and to execute the branch destination suggestion performance using pattern Z 35% of the time. Also, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, if the reach effect to be executed is determined to be reach effect D, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 10% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect pattern X is determined to be executed 30% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect pattern Y is determined to be executed 20% of the time, and the branch destination suggestion effect pattern Z is determined to be executed 40% of the time.

In particular, in this modified example 029SG-6, when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate of the branch destination suggestion performance is set higher (the decision rate of not executing the branch destination suggestion performance is set lower) than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, so that it is possible to appropriately suggest that a development notification performance such as a reach performance H development notification performance or a high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be executed while the variable display is being executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-6, when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate of the branch destination suggestion performance is set higher than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate of the branch destination suggestion performance may be set lower than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-6, when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate for branch destination suggestion performance pattern Z (a performance pattern suggesting the execution of a high expectation reach performance development notification performance) is set higher than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, so that it is possible to more appropriately suggest the execution of development notification performances such as the reach performance H development notification performance and the high expectation reach performance development notification performance during the execution of the variable display, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in variant example 029SG-6, when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate for pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion performance is set higher than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate for pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion performance may be set lower than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-6, as shown in FIG. 19-59, in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ, an example is given in which it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect at different rates when the reach presentation of the executed super reach is reach presentation C and reach presentation D, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to determine whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect at different rates when the reach presentation of the executed super reach is reach presentation C and reach presentation D for the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach θ and super reach ι.

Moreover, in this modified example 029SG-6, a form is exemplified in which a branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of reach performance C (first advantageous outcome suggestion effect in invention 033SG) and a branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of reach performance D (second advantageous outcome suggestion effect in invention 033SG) can be executed as effects of the same presentation type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of reach performance C and the branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of reach performance D can be executed as effects of different presentation types.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in Figs. 19-5 to 19-9, as the reach performance of the super reach, reach performance A to reach performance D are executed, and as for the notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I, a notification mode (first notification mode) in which one of these reach performances A to D is executed and the variable display result is notified is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-7, as for the notification mode in which the reach performance of the super reach is executed, reach performance A to reach performance D is executed, and as for the notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I, in addition to the first notification mode, a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) in which the variable display result is notified as a miss as a performance result of reach performance A to reach performance D and then the variable display result is notified as a jackpot again may be provided.

In this way, when reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and a first notification mode and a second notification mode are provided as notification modes in which the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I, the percentage of the branch destination suggestion performance being executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the first notification mode may be the same as the percentage of the branch destination suggestion performance being executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode.

In this way, reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and by providing a second notification mode as a notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I, it is possible to give a sense of surprise to the player by notifying the player that the variable display result is a jackpot even though the variable display result was initially notified as a miss. Furthermore, since the process of deciding to execute the branch destination suggestion performance can be made common between the case in which the performance result (variable display result) of executing reach performance C and reach performance D is notified in the first notification mode and the case in which it is notified in the second notification mode, the amount of data required for this process can be reduced.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-7, when reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and a first notification mode and a second notification mode are provided as notification modes in which the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I, an example is given in which the rate at which the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the first notification mode is the same as the rate at which the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and a first notification mode and a second notification mode are provided as notification modes in which the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I, the percentage of the branch destination suggestion effect being executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the first notification mode may be different from the percentage of the branch destination suggestion effect being executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode.

In addition, in the modified example 029SG-7, as for the notification mode in which reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I, a first notification mode in which any of these reach performances A to D are executed and the variable display result is notified, and a second notification mode in which the variable display result is notified as a miss as the performance result of reach performance A to reach performance D, and then the variable display result is notified as a jackpot again is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as modified example 029SG-8, reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, and after it is notified that the variable display result of the reach performance C or reach performance D is a miss, the reach performance G development notification performance and the reach performance G are executed, and it is notified that the variable display result of the reach performance G is a jackpot (when the variable display is executed in the variable display of the super reach θ jackpot (PB1-7)), the rate at which the chance up performance is executed during the variable display in the variable display of the super reach θ jackpot may be different from the rate at which the chance up performance is executed in the variable display where the performance result (variable display result) of the reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode. In this way, when the reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, the execution rate of the chance up performance can be made different depending on whether or not the reach performance G is executed before it is notified that the variable display result is a jackpot, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this modified example, the percentage at which the chance-up effect is executed during the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ jackpot is different from the percentage at which the chance-up effect is executed in the variable display in which the performance result (variable display result) of the reach performance C or the reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the percentage at which the chance-up effect is executed during the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ jackpot may be the same as the percentage at which the chance-up effect is executed in the variable display in which the performance result (variable display result) of the reach performance C or the reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 19-27, a branch destination suggestion effect can be executed in a plurality of presentation patterns, and a form is exemplified in which the rate at which a high expectation reach presentation development notification effect is executed varies depending on which presentation pattern is executed in which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed. In particular, in the characteristic part 029SG, a form in which a branch destination suggestion effect is executed in presentation pattern Z is exemplified as a form in which a high expectation reach presentation development notification effect is executed with the highest rate, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when a branch destination suggestion effect is executed in presentation pattern Z, a high expectation reach presentation development notification effect may be executed with an extremely high rate (for example, 99%).

In particular, in the case where the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed with an extremely high probability when the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in performance pattern Z, a case where the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is not executed even though the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in performance pattern Z, or a case where a reach performance I is executed even though a high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is not executed (a so-called performance contradiction pattern) may be provided. Note that, when such a performance contradiction pattern is provided, a sense of surprise can be given to the player by executing the branch destination suggestion performance or the reach performance I in the performance contradiction pattern only when the variable display result is notified that it is a jackpot, and the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed when the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z or when the reach performance I is executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 19-30, for the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach θ, in which the variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, and then the reach performance G development notification performance and reach performance G are executed, the execution decision ratio of reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of reach performance D are different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-10, for the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach θ, the execution decision ratio of reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of reach performance D may be the same. By doing so, in both cases where reach performance C is executed and where reach performance D is executed, the player can expect that the reach performance development notification performance will be executed after the variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, which can increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-10, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach θ, an embodiment in which the execution decision ratio of reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of reach performance D are the same is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in both cases in which reach performance C is executed and in which reach performance D is executed, as long as it is possible to achieve an effect in which the player can expect that the reach performance development notification performance will be executed after the variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, the execution decision ratio of reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of reach performance D may differ by a small difference (for example, the difference between the execution decision ratio of reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of reach performance D is about 1% to 5%, i.e., the execution decision ratio of reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of reach performance D are approximately the same).

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 19-30, for the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ in which the variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D, and then the reach performance G development notification performance and the reach performance G are executed, the jackpot expectation degree when the execution of the reach performance C is decided is smaller than the jackpot expectation degree when the execution of the reach performance D is decided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-11, for the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ, the jackpot expectation degree when the execution of the reach performance C is decided and the jackpot expectation degree when the execution of the reach performance D is decided may be the same. In this way, in both the case where the reach performance C is executed and the case where the reach performance is executed, when the reach performance G development notification performance is executed, the player can expect that the variable display result will be a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance G, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-11, for the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach θ, the jackpot expectation degree when the execution of the reach performance C is decided and the jackpot expectation degree when the execution of the reach performance D is decided are the same, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as it is possible to achieve an effect that the player can expect that the variable display result will be a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance G when the reach performance G development notification performance is executed, the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance C and the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance D may differ by a small difference (for example, the difference between the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance C and the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance D is about 1% to 5%, that is, the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance C and the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance D are approximately the same) in both the cases where the reach performance C and the reach performance are executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-34, in the characteristic part 029SG, it is possible to execute the display of the reach title in red, the movement of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and the display of an image of the stick controller 31A as an operation prompting image as the effects that constitute the chance-up effect, and an example has been given of a form in which the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 can be executed as a common effect in reach effects A to D that are executed before the reach effect E development announcement effect and the high expectation reach effect development announcement effect, and in reach effects E and reach effects F that are executed before the reach effect E development announcement effect and the high expectation reach effect development announcement effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-12, the expectation of a jackpot may be made to differ depending on whether the common effect of the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the reach effects A to F. This makes it possible to limit the increase in the number of effects that can be executed as chance-up effects (the number of effect patterns for chance-up effects), while drawing the player's attention to which reach effect the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 are being executed during, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 19-34, an example is given in which the presence or absence of a chance up effect and the presentation pattern of the chance up effect can be determined at different rates depending on whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence or absence of a chance up effect and the presentation pattern of the chance up effect can be determined at different rates depending on whether any of the reach effects E to I is executed.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 19-60 as modified example 029SG-13, for the Super Reach κ variation pattern in which the high expectation reach performance development notification performance and reach performance I are executed before the variable display result (miss) is announced as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, it may be possible to determine whether or not to execute the chance up performance at different rates when the execution of reach performance C is decided and when the execution of reach performance D is decided. In particular, in the variable display of the Super Reach κ variation pattern, when the execution of reach performance D is decided, the execution of the chance up performance is decided at a higher rate than when the execution of reach performance C is decided, so that when the execution of reach performance D is decided, it is possible to clearly suggest to the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, which can increase the interest in the game.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned modified example 029SG-7, a form was exemplified in which a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) is provided in which the variable display result is once notified that it is a miss as a result of the reach effects A to D, and then the variable display result is once notified that it is a jackpot. However, as the second notification mode, as shown in FIG. 19-61(A) as modified example 029SG-14, a revival mode may be executed in which the variable display result is once notified that it is a miss and then notifies that the variable display result is a jackpot between the timing when the variable display stops.

In particular, in the case where the revival performance is executed after the variable display result of the reach performance A to the reach performance D is notified that the variable display result is a miss (when the variable display is executed in any one of the variable patterns of Super Reach α, Super Reach β, and Super Reach γ to result in a jackpot), as shown in Figures 19-61 (A) to 19-61 (C), the length L21 of the performance period of the revival performance is set to the start time of the reach performance E development suggestion performance in the case where the variable display result of the reach performance B is notified that the variable display result is a miss and then the reach performance E development suggestion performance, the reach performance E development notification performance, and the reach performance E are executed (when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern of Super Reach ζ). It is also possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the presentation becoming redundant by setting the period L22 from the start of the reach presentation E to the end of the reach presentation E (the variable display result notification timing), or the period L23 from the start of the reach presentation G development suggestion presentation to the end of the reach presentation G (the variable display result notification timing) when the reach presentation G development suggestion presentation, the reach presentation G development notification presentation, or the reach presentation G is executed after the variable display result of the reach presentation C or the reach presentation D is notified that it is a miss (when the variable display is executed in the variable display pattern of the super reach θ). (L22>L21, L23>21)

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 19-61(A) to 19-61(C), by setting the length L21 of the presentation period of the revival presentation to be shorter than the length L32 of the period from the start timing of the reach presentation E development suggestion presentation to the end timing of the reach presentation E development notification presentation, or the length L33 of the period from the start timing of the reach presentation G development suggestion presentation to the end timing of the reach presentation G development notification presentation, it is possible to add a sense of surprise to the notification that the variable display result is a miss.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-14, a form in which the variable display result is once notified that it is a miss as a result of the performance of reach performance A to reach performance D, and then a revival performance is executed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a revival performance may also be executed when a high expectation reach performance development notification performance or reach performance F is executed during the execution of reach performance A (when a variable display is executed in the variable pattern of super reach η and a jackpot is obtained), when a pre-performance, a precursor performance, a reach performance H development notification performance, or a reach performance H is executed during the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D (when a variable display is executed in the variable pattern of super reach ι and a jackpot is obtained), or when a pre-performance, a precursor performance, a high expectation reach performance development notification performance, or a reach performance I is executed during the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D (when a variable display is executed in the variable pattern of super reach κ and a jackpot is obtained).

As shown in the characteristic part 029SG, the probability of a jackpot being obtained when reach performance A to reach performance D are executed (expected jackpot) is set lower than the probability of a jackpot being obtained when reach performance F, reach performance G, and reach performance I are executed (expected jackpot). Therefore, in the case where the variable display result is a jackpot, the probability of a revival performance being executed after the variable display result of reach performance A to reach performance D is notified that the variable display result is a miss can be set higher than the probability of a jackpot being obtained when reach performance F, reach performance G, and reach performance I are executed, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the revival performance being executed even when reach performance A to reach performance D are executed and the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is a miss.

In addition, in cases where the variable display result of reach performance B is once notified that it is a miss as a performance result of reach performance B, and then a reach performance E development suggestion performance, a reach performance E development notification performance, and a reach performance E are executed to result in a jackpot (when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern of Super Reach ζ to result in a jackpot), or when the variable display result of reach performance C or reach performance D is once notified that it is a miss as a performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, then a reach performance G development suggestion performance, a reach performance G development notification performance, and a reach performance G are executed to result in a jackpot (when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern of Super Reach θ to result in a jackpot), a revival performance may be executed. When the variable display is executed in the variable display pattern of Super Reach θ, it is notified once before the revival performance that the variable display result will be a miss. Therefore, in order to prevent the presentation from becoming redundant and reducing interest in the game due to the variable display result of the reach performance being notified twice or more, the revival performance may not be executed when the variable display is executed in the variable display pattern of Super Reach ζ or Super Reach θ and a jackpot is reached, or the revival performance may be executed at a lower rate than when the variable display is executed in the variable display pattern of Super Reach α to Super Reach γ, Super Reach η, Super Reach ι, or Super Reach κ and a jackpot is reached.

In addition, in the characteristic section 029SG, an example was given of a form in which the time-saving state can be controlled after the end of a jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving state can also be controlled when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number (e.g., 900 times), or when the variable display result is a miss, the time-saving state can also be controlled when a partial miss is derived and displayed.

In particular, in the case of controlling the time-shortened state in response to the number of times the variable display is executed reaching a specific number, or in the case of controlling the time-shortened state in response to the derivation display of some losses, a high-expectation reach performance development notification effect shown in the characteristic part 029SG or a notification effect that notifies the player that the time-shortened state will be controlled after the revival effect shown in the modified example 029SG-14 is executed may be executed. In this way, in the case of controlling the time-shortened state in response to the number of times the variable display is executed reaching a specific number, or in the case of controlling the time-shortened state in response to the derivation display of some losses, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the time-shortened state will be controlled by executing a high-expectation reach performance development notification effect or a revival effect, whether a notification that the variable display result is a jackpot will be announced, or whether a high-expectation reach performance such as reach performance I will be executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, as characteristic part 029SG, a form in which both invention 029SG and invention 033SG are implemented is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of invention 029SG and invention 033SG may be implemented.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, an example of the present invention being applied to a pachinko gaming machine 1 is given, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to a slot machine.

LIST OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special pattern display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning port 11 ... Main board 12 ... Performance control board 13 ... Sound control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal pattern display device 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start port switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Ball hitting operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122...RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I/O
120 ... Performance control CPU
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances including a first suggestion performance, a second suggestion performance, a third suggestion performance, and a fourth suggestion performance as suggestion performances that suggest control to the advantageous state;
a development performance execution means capable of executing a first development performance before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is notified, and capable of executing a second development performance different from the first development performance after it is notified that the advantageous state will not be controlled as a performance result of the second suggestion performance;
A chance-up effect execution means for executing a chance-up effect in which the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state varies depending on the number of times the effect is executed during the execution of the suggestion effect;
A notice performance execution means capable of executing notice performances with different expectations depending on the performance mode;
A special image display effect execution means capable of displaying a special image;
and a special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance that changes the preview performance executed in one performance mode to a performance mode with a higher expectation than the one performance mode by using the displayed special image,
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
The third suggestion performance can be executed after the first development performance is executed,
The fourth suggestion performance can be executed after the second development performance is executed,
The chance-up effect execution means includes:
The chance-up effect can be executed so that the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the third suggestion effect is being executed is greater than the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the first suggestion effect is being executed,
The chance-up effect can be executed such that the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the fourth suggestion effect is executed is equal to or less than the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the second suggestion effect is executed,
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
After informing the player that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state as a result of the suggestive performance, a performance of a revival mode informing the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state can be executed;
When the fourth suggestion performance is executed after the second development performance is executed, the fourth suggestion performance does not execute a revival mode performance,
The first development performance includes an information display performance that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled by displaying information,
The information display performance includes a first information display performance that displays first information composed of a first number of pieces of information, and a second information display performance that can be executed after the first information display performance and that displays second information composed of a second number of pieces of information,
In the first information display performance, the first information can be divided into a plurality of pieces of information and sequentially displayed, and in the second information display performance, the second information can be divided into a plurality of pieces of information and sequentially displayed,
A display start mode when starting to display the first information in the first information display performance is different from a display start mode when starting to display the second information in the second information display performance,
When the presentation mode of the preview presentation is changed by the special presentation, there are a plurality of presentation modes after the change, and the proportion of the advantageous state controlled varies depending on which presentation mode is changed to.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images